WARRANTY

Samsung Medison provides the following warranty to the purchaser of this unit. This warranty is valid for
a period of one year from the date of installation and covers all problems caused by faulty workmanship
or faulty material. Samsung Medison will, as sole and exclusive remedy and at no charge, replace any such
defective unit returned to Samsung Medison within the designated warranty period.

The warranty does not cover damages and loss caused by outside factors including, but not limited to, fire,
flood, storm, tidal wave, lightning, earthquake, theft, abnormal conditions of operation, and intentional
destruction of the equipment. Damage caused by equipment relocation is not covered.

The warranty is void in cases where the equipment has been damaged as a result of an accident, misuse,
abuse, dropping, or when attempts to modify or alter any part or assembly of the equipment have taken
place.

Parts with cosmetic defects or deterioration will not be replaced. Replacement of batteries, training
materials, and supplies are not covered.

Samsung Medison will not be responsible for incidental or consequential damages of any kind arising
from or connected with the use of the equipment.

Samsung Medison will not be responsible for any loss, damage, or injury resulting from a delay in services
rendered under the warranty

This limited warranty is in lieu of all other warranties expressed or implied, including warranties of
merchant ability or fitness for any particular use. No representative or other person is authorized to
represent or assume for Samsung Medison any warranty liability beyond that set forth herein.

Defective equipment shipped from you to Samsung Medison must be packed in the replacement
cartons. Shipping and insurance costs are the responsibility of the customer. To return defective material
to Samsung Medison contact the Samsung Medison Customer Service Department.

Samsung Medison or a local distributor will make available, upon request, circuit diagrams, a component
parts list, descriptions, calibration instructions and other information which will assist your appropriately
qualified technical personnel to repair those parts of the equipment which are designed by Samsung
Medison as repairable.

CAUTION: United State federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of physicians.

MANUFACTURER : SAMSUNG MEDISON CO., LTD.

42, Teheran-ro 108-gil, Gangnam-gu, Seoul, Korea

Customer Service Department : SAMSUNG MEDISON CO., LTD.

TEL : 82-2-2194-1234 FAX : 82-2-2194-1071
Website: www.samsungmedison.com

EC Representative : SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

Blackbushe Business Park, Saxony Way,
Yateley, Hampshire, GU46 6GG, UK
Diagnostic Ultrasound System

Operation Manual
VERSION 1.02.00
English

M353-E10200-01
PROPRIETRAY INFORMATION AND SOFTWARE LICENSE

The Customer shall keep confidential all proprietary information furnished or disclosed to the Customer by
Samsung Medison, unless such information has become part of the public domain through no fault of the
Customer. The Customer shall not use such proprietary information, without the prior written consent of
Samsung Medison, for any purpose other than the maintenance, repair or operation of the goods.

Samsung Medison’s systems contain Samsung Medison’s proprietary software in machine-readable form.
Samsung Medison retains all its rights, title and interest in the software except that purchase of this product
includes a license to use the machine-readable software contained in it. The Customer shall not copy, trace,
disassemble or modify the software. Transfer of this product by the Customer shall constitute a transfer of this
license that shall not be otherwise transferable. Upon cancellation or termination of this contract or return of
the goods for reasons other than repair or modification, the Customer shall return to Samsung Medison all
such proprietary information.
 Safety Requirements
■ Classifications:
▶ Type of protection against electrical shock: Class I
▶ Degree of protection against electrical shock (Patient connection): Type BF equipment
▶ Degree of protection against harmful ingress of water: Ordinary equipment
▶ Degree of safety of application in the presence of a flammable anesthetic material with air or with
oxygen or nitrous oxide: Equipment not suitable for use in the presence of a flammable anesthetic
mixture with air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide.
▶ Mode of operation: Continuous operation

■ Electromechanical safety standards met:

▶ Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 1: General Requirements for Basic Safety and Essential Performance
[IEC 60601-1:2005]
▶ Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 1-2: General Requirements for Basic Safety and Essential
Performance - Collateral Standard: Electromagnetic Compatibility - Requirements and Tests [IEC
60601-1-2:2007]
▶ Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 1-6: General Requirements for Basic Safety and Essential
Performance- Collateral Standard: Usability [IEC 60601-1-6:2006]
▶ Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 2-37: Particular Requirements for the Basic Safety and Essential
Performance of Ultrasonic Medical Diagnostic and Monitoring Equipment [IEC60601-2-37:2007]
▶ Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 1: General Requirements for Safety [IEC 60601-1:1988 with A1:1991
and A2:1995]
▶ Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 1: General Requirements for Safety – 1 Collateral Standard: safety
Requirement for Medical Electrical Systems [IEC 60601-1-1:2000]
▶ Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 1: General Requirements for Safety - 2 Collateral Standard:
Electromagnetic Compatibility - Requirements and Test [IEC 60601-1-2:2001, A1:2004]
▶ Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 1: General Requirements for Safety - 4 Collateral Standard:
Programmable Electrical Medical Systems [IEC 60601-1-4: 1996, A1:1999]
▶ Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 2: Particular Requirements for Safety - 37 Ultrasonic Medical
Diagnostic and Monitoring Equipment [IEC60601-2-37: 2001 with A1:2004, A2:2005]
▶ Medical Devices – Application of Risk Management to Medical Devices [ISO 14971:2007]
▶ Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 1: General Requirements for Safety [UL60601-1:2003]
▶ Medical Electrical Equipment - Part 1: General Requirements for Safety [CAN/CSA 22.2
No.601.1-M90:1990, with R2003, with R2005]
 ▶ Biological Evaluation of Medical Devices [ISO10993 : 2009]
▶ Standard Means for the Reporting of the Acoustic Output of Medical Diagnostic Ultrasonic Equipment
[IEC61157:2007]

■ Declarations

This is CSA symbol for Canada and United States of America

This is manufacturer’s declaration of product compliance with

applicable EEC directive(s) and the European notified body.

This is manufacturer’s declaration of product compliance with

applicable EEC directive(s).
Read This First

How to Use Your Manual

This manual addresses the reader who is familiar with ultrasound techniques. Only medical doctors
or persons supervised by medical doctors should use this system. Sonography training and clinical
procedures are not included here. This manual is not intended to be used as training material for the
principles of ultrasound, anatomy, scanning techniques, or applications. You should be familiar with all of
these areas before attempting to use this manual or your ultrasound system.
This manual does not include diagnosis results or opinions. Also, check the measurement reference for
each application’s result measurement before the final diagnosis.
It is useless to make constant or complex adjustments to the equipment controls. The system has been
preset at the factory to produce an optimum image in the majority of patients. User adjustments are not
usually required. If the user wishes to change image settings, the variables may be set as desired. Optimal
images are obtained with little difficulty.
We are not responsible for errors that occur when the system is run on a user’s PC.
Non-Samsung Medison product names may be trademarks of their respective owners.
Please keep this user guide close to the product as a reference when using the system.
For safe use of this product, you should read ‘Chapter1. Safety’ and ‘Chapter8. Maintenance’ in this manual,
prior to starting to use this system.
NOTE: Some features are not available in some countries. The features with options, and
specifications that this manual present can be changed without notice. Government approval is still
pending in some nations.
Conventions Used in This Manual

DANGER: Describes precautions necessary to prevent user hazards of great urgency. Ignoring a
DANGER warning will risk life-threatening injury.

WARNING: Used to indicate the presence of a hazard that can cause serious personal injury, or
substantial property damage.

CAUTION: Indicates the presence of a hazard that can cause equipment damage.

NOTE: A piece of information useful for installing, operating and maintaining a system. Not related
to any hazard.

If You Need Assistance

If you need any assistance with the equipment, like the service manual, please contact the Samsung
Medison Customer Service Department or one of their worldwide customer service representatives,
immediately.
 Revision History
DOCUMENT DATE REASON FOR CHANGE

M353-E10200-01 2012-05-15 Initial Release

System Upgrades and Manual Set Updates

Samsung Medison Ultrasound is committed to innovation and continued improvement. Upgrades may be
announced that consist of hardware or software improvements. Updated manuals will accompany those
system upgrades.
Verify that Check if this version of the manual is correct for the system version. If not, please contact the
Customer Service Department.
 Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Safety
Indication for Use........................................................................................................................ 1-3
Contraindications................................................................................................................................................................ 1-3

Safety Signs.................................................................................................................................. 1-4

Safety Symbols..................................................................................................................................................................... 1-4
Symbols.................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-5
Labels ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-6

Electrical Safety........................................................................................................................... 1-8

Prevention of Electric Shock........................................................................................................................................... 1-8
ECG-Related Information...............................................................................................................................................1-10
ESD..........................................................................................................................................................................................1-10
EMI..........................................................................................................................................................................................1-11
EMC........................................................................................................................................................................................1-11

Mechanical Safety..................................................................................................................... 1-18

Moving the Equipment...................................................................................................................................................1-18
Safety Note..........................................................................................................................................................................1-19

Biological Safety....................................................................................................................... 1-21

ALARA Principle.................................................................................................................................................................1-21

Environmental Protection....................................................................................................... 1-35

Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment............................................................................................................1-35

Chapter 2 Introduction
Specifications.............................................................................................................................. 2-3
Product Configuration .............................................................................................................. 2-5
Monitor .................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-7
Control Panel........................................................................................................................................................................ 2-9
Console.................................................................................................................................................................................2-16
Peripheral Devices ...........................................................................................................................................................2-18
Probe......................................................................................................................................................................................2-20
ECG Lead .............................................................................................................................................................................2-21
Accessories..........................................................................................................................................................................2-23
Optional Functions...........................................................................................................................................................2-24

13
 Operation Manual

Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis

Power Supply............................................................................................................................... 3-3
Powering On......................................................................................................................................................................... 3-3
Powering Off......................................................................................................................................................................... 3-3

Probes & Applications................................................................................................................ 3-4

Probe Selection and Application.................................................................................................................................. 3-5
Changing Application....................................................................................................................................................... 3-5
Editing Probe Preset Values............................................................................................................................................. 3-5

Patient Information.................................................................................................................... 3-7

Patient Information for Application............................................................................................................................. 3-9
Finding Patient Information..........................................................................................................................................3-16
Managing Patient Exams...............................................................................................................................................3-18
Reviewing Measurements.............................................................................................................................................3-25

Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes

Information.................................................................................................................................. 4-3
Diagnosis Mode Type........................................................................................................................................................ 4-3
Basic Use................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-4

Basic Mode................................................................................................................................... 4-7

2D Mode................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-7
M Mode.................................................................................................................................................................................4-12
Color Doppler Mode........................................................................................................................................................4-15
Power Doppler Mode......................................................................................................................................................4-19
PW Spectral Doppler Mode...........................................................................................................................................4-22
CW Spectral Doppler Mode..........................................................................................................................................4-27
TDI Mode..............................................................................................................................................................................4-29
TDW Mode...........................................................................................................................................................................4-30

Combined Mode....................................................................................................................... 4-31

2D/C/PW Mode..................................................................................................................................................................4-31
2D/PD/PW Mode...............................................................................................................................................................4-31
2D/C/CW Mode..................................................................................................................................................................4-31
2D/PD/CW Mode...............................................................................................................................................................4-31
2D/C/M Mode.....................................................................................................................................................................4-32
2D/C Live Mode.................................................................................................................................................................4-32
2D/TDI/TDW........................................................................................................................................................................4-32

14
 Table of Contents

Multi-Image Mode.................................................................................................................... 4-33

Dual Mode...........................................................................................................................................................................4-33
Quad Mode..........................................................................................................................................................................4-35

Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Measurement Accuracy............................................................................................................. 5-3
Causes of Measurement Errors...................................................................................................................................... 5-3
Optimization of Measurement Accuracy................................................................................................................... 5-5
Measurement Accuracy Table........................................................................................................................................ 5-7

Basic Measurements.................................................................................................................. 5-8

Distance Measurement...................................................................................................................................................5-10
Circumference and Area Measurement...................................................................................................................5-14
Volume Measurement.....................................................................................................................................................5-16

Calculations by Application.................................................................................................... 5-19

Things to note....................................................................................................................................................................5-19
Common Measurement Methods..............................................................................................................................5-23
Cardiac Calculations.........................................................................................................................................................5-28
Vascular Calculations.......................................................................................................................................................5-36
Fetal Echo Calculations...................................................................................................................................................5-60
TCD Calculations...............................................................................................................................................................5-63
OB Calculations..................................................................................................................................................................5-66
Gynecology Calculations ..............................................................................................................................................5-73
Abdomen Calculations ..................................................................................................................................................5-75

Report......................................................................................................................................... 5-78
Viewing Report..................................................................................................................................................................5-79
Editing Report....................................................................................................................................................................5-80
Adding Comment.............................................................................................................................................................5-82
Printing Report...................................................................................................................................................................5-82
Transfer Report...................................................................................................................................................................5-83
Export Report.....................................................................................................................................................................5-84
Change Template .............................................................................................................................................................5-85
Insert Image........................................................................................................................................................................5-88
Store SR.................................................................................................................................................................................5-88
Stress Echo Report............................................................................................................................................................5-89
Graph ....................................................................................................................................................................................5-90
Closing Report....................................................................................................................................................................5-94

15
 Operation Manual

Chapter 6 Image Management

CINE / LOOP.................................................................................................................................. 6-3
Annotating Images..................................................................................................................... 6-6
Text........................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-6
Body Marker ......................................................................................................................................................................... 6-9
Indicator ..............................................................................................................................................................................6-11

Saving, Playing and Transferring Images............................................................................. 6-13

Saving Images ...................................................................................................................................................................6-13
Playing Images...................................................................................................................................................................6-14
Transferring Images ........................................................................................................................................................6-15

Printing and Recording Images ............................................................................................ 6-16

Printing Images..................................................................................................................................................................6-16
Recording Images ............................................................................................................................................................6-16

SONOVIEW................................................................................................................................. 6-17
Using Tips.............................................................................................................................................................................6-19
Exam Mode..........................................................................................................................................................................6-20
Compare Mode..................................................................................................................................................................6-22
Exam Tool.............................................................................................................................................................................6-24

Chapter 7 Utilities
Setup............................................................................................................................................. 7-3
General ................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-4
Display .................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-8
Annotate...............................................................................................................................................................................7-11
Peripherals...........................................................................................................................................................................7-15
User Defined Key...............................................................................................................................................................7-18
Miscellaneous.....................................................................................................................................................................7-20
Option...................................................................................................................................................................................7-24
DICOM (optional)..............................................................................................................................................................7-25
Auto Calc..............................................................................................................................................................................7-41
About.....................................................................................................................................................................................7-42

Measurement Setup................................................................................................................. 7-43

General .................................................................................................................................................................................7-44
Obstetrics.............................................................................................................................................................................7-53
Cardiac .................................................................................................................................................................................7-62
Vascular ................................................................................................................................................................................7-64
Fetal Echo.............................................................................................................................................................................7-66

16
 Table of Contents

Utility........................................................................................................................................... 7-67
Storage Manager...............................................................................................................................................................7-67

ECG............................................................................................................................................... 7-69
Stress Echo (Optional).............................................................................................................. 7-72
Setting a Protocol.............................................................................................................................................................7-72
Starting a Protocol And Capturing Images.............................................................................................................7-78
Image Review.....................................................................................................................................................................7-85

Strain Image (optional)............................................................................................................ 7-90

Strain......................................................................................................................................................................................7-91
Auto EF..................................................................................................................................................................................7-98
TMAD.................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-101

Chapter 8 Maintenance
Operating Environment............................................................................................................ 8-3
System Maintenance.................................................................................................................. 8-4
Cleaning and disinfections ............................................................................................................................................. 8-4
Fuse Replacement.............................................................................................................................................................. 8-6
Cleaning Air Filters.............................................................................................................................................................. 8-7
Accuracy Check.................................................................................................................................................................... 8-7

Data Maintenance...................................................................................................................... 8-8

User Setting Back up.......................................................................................................................................................... 8-8
Patient information Back-up........................................................................................................................................... 8-8
Software................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-8

Chapter 9 Probes
Probes........................................................................................................................................... 9-3
Ultrasound transmission Gel.......................................................................................................................................... 9-7
Sheaths................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-8
Probe Precautions............................................................................................................................................................... 9-9
Cleaning and Disinfecting the Probe........................................................................................................................9-11
MPTEE Probe (Optional).................................................................................................................................................9-18

** Reference Manual
Samsung Medison is providing an additional EKO 7 Reference Manual (English version). GA tables and
references for each application are included in the Reference Manual.

17
 1
Chapter
Safety

‹‹Indication for Use............................................ 1-3

Contraindications.....................................................................1-3

‹‹Safety Signs...................................................... 1-4

Safety Symbols..........................................................................1-4
Symbols........................................................................................1-5
Labels ...........................................................................................1-6

‹‹Electrical Safety............................................... 1-8

Prevention of Electric Shock.................................................1-8
ECG-Related Information.....................................................1-10
ESD...............................................................................................1-10
EMI................................................................................................1-11
EMC..............................................................................................1-11

‹‹Mechanical Safety.........................................1-18
Moving the Equipment........................................................1-18
Safety Note................................................................................1-19

‹‹Biological Safety............................................1-21
ALARA Principle......................................................................1-21

‹‹Environmental Protection...........................1-35
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment..................1-35
 Chapter 1 Safety

Indication for Use

The EKO 7 Diagnostic Ultrasound System and transducers are intended for diagnostic ultrasound imaging
and fluid analysis of the human body.
The clinical applications include: Fetal, Abdominal, Pediatric, Small Organs, Adult Cephalic, Trans-esophageal
(non-Cardiac, Cardiac), Muscular-Skeletal (conventional, superficial), Cardiac Adult, Cardiac Pediatric and
Peripheral-vessel.

Contraindications
The EKO 7 system is not intended for ophthalmic use or any use causing the acoustic beam to pass through
the eye.
CAUTION:
XX
Federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician.
XX
The method of application or use of the device is described in the manual 'Chapter 3. Starting
Diagnosis' and 'Chapter 4. Diagnosis Modes'.

1-3
 Operation Manual

Safety Signs
Please read this chapter before using the Samsung Medison ultrasound system. It is relevant to the
ultrasound system, the probes, the recording devices, and any of the optional equipment.
EKO 7 is intended for use by, or by the order of, and under the supervision of, a licensed physician who is
qualified for direct use of the medical device.

Safety Symbols
The International Electro Technical Commission (IEC) has established a set of symbols for medical electronic
equipment, which classify a connection or warn of potential hazards. The classifications and symbols are
shown below.

Symbols Description Symbols Description

AC (alternating current) voltage

Identifies an equipotential ground.
source

Indicates a caution for risk of electric Indicates dangerous voltages over

shock. 1000V AC or over 1500V DC.

Identifies the point where the system

safety ground is fastened to the
Isolated patient connection (Type BF
chassis. Protective earth connected to
applied part).
conductive parts of Class I equipment
for safety purposes.

Power switch (Supplies/cuts the

Data Output port
power for product)

On/Off button Data Input port

Caution Data Input/Output port

Refer to the operation manual Left and right Audio / Video input

1-4
 Chapter 1 Safety

Symbols Description Symbols Description

Protection against the effects of

Left and right Audio / Video output
immersion.

Remote print output Protection against dripping water.

Foot switch connector Probe connector

ESD (Electrostatic discharge) caution

ECG connector
symbol

USB connector Probe connector

Microphone connector Do not sit on control panel

Do not push the product Do not lean against the product

Follow the operation manual

Symbols
Symbols Description Symbols Description

Authorized Representative In The

Manufacturer
European Community

1-5
 Operation Manual

Labels
To protect the system, you may see ‘Warning’ or ‘Caution’ marked on the surface of the product.

[Label 1. ID label]

1-6
 Chapter 1 Safety

[Label 2. Marked below OUTLET]

[Label 3. Safety note for “TIP-OVER” Precaution]

[Label 4. Prohibition of seating on Control panel]

1-7
 Operation Manual

Electrical Safety
This equipment has been verified as a Class I device with Type BF applied parts.

CAUTION:
XX
As for US requirement, the LEAKAGE CURRENT might be measured from a center-tapped circuit
when the equipment connects in the United States to 240V supply system.
XX
To help assure grounding reliability, connect to a “hospital grade” or “hospital only” grounded
power outlet.

Prevention of Electric Shock

In a hospital, dangerous currents are due to the potential differences between connected equipment and
touchable conducting parts found in medical rooms. The solution to the problem is consistent equipotential
bonding. Medical equipment is connected with connecting leads made up of angled sockets to the
equipotential bonding network in medical rooms.

Equipotential Terminal

Connection Lead
(Socket)
Earth in Medical Room

Equipotential Connector

[Figure 1.1 Equipotential bonding]

1-8
 Chapter 1 Safety

Additional equipment connected to medical electrical equipment must comply with the respective IEC or
ISO standards (e.g. IEC 60950 for data processing equipment). Furthermore all configurations shall comply
with the requirements for medical electrical systems (see IEC 60601-1-1 or clause 16 of the 3 Ed. of IEC 60601-
1, respectively). Anybody connecting additional equipment to medical electrical equipment configures a
medical system and is therefore responsible that the system complies with the requirements for medical
electrical systems. Attention is drawn to the fact that local laws take priority over the above-mentioned
requirements. If in doubt, consult your local representative or the technical service department.

WARNING:
XX
Electric shock may exist result if this system, including and all of its externally mounted recording
and monitoring devices, is not properly grounded.
XX
Do not remove the covers on the system; hazardous voltages are present inside. Cabinet panels
must be in place while the system is in use. All internal adjustments and replacements must be
made by a qualified Samsung Medison Customer Service Department.
XX
Check the face, housing, and cable before use. Do not use and disconnect the power source, if
the face is cracked, chipped, or torn, the housing is damaged, or if the cable is abraded.
XX
Always disconnect the system from the wall outlet prior to cleaning the system.
XX
All patient contact devices, such as probes and ECG leads, must be removed from the patient
prior to application of a high voltage defibrillation pulse.
XX
Never use the product in proximity to any flammable anesthetic gases (N2O) or oxidizing gases.
There is a risk of explosion.
XX
Avoid places where the system is likely to be difficult to operate the disconnection device.

CAUTION:
XX
The system has been designed for 100-120VAC and 200-240VAC; you should select the input
voltage of printer and VCR. Prior to connecting a peripheral power cord, verify that the voltage
indicated on the power cord matches the voltage rating of the peripheral device.
XX
An isolation transformer protects the system from power surges. The isolation transformer
continues to operate when the system is in standby.
XX
Do not immerse the cable in liquids. Cables are not waterproof.
XX
The auxiliary socket outlets installed on this system are rated 100-120V and 200-240V with
maximum total load of 200W. Use these outlets only for supplying power to equipment that is
intended to be part of the ultrasound system. Do not connect additional multiple-socket outlets
or extension cords to the system.
XX
Do not touch SIP/SOP and the patient simultaneously. There is a risk of electric shock from
leakage current.

1-9
 Operation Manual

ECG-Related Information
WARNING:
XX
This device is not intended to provide a primary ECG monitoring function, and therefore does
not have means of indicating an inoperative electrocardiograph.
XX
Do not use ECG electrodes of HF surgical equipment. Any malfunctions in the HF surgical
equipment may result in burns to the patient.
XX
Do not use ECG electrodes during cardiac pacemaker procedures or other electrical stimulators.
XX
Do not use ECG leads and electrodes in an operating room.

ESD
Electrostatic discharge (ESD), commonly referred to as a static shock, is a naturally occurring phenomenon.
ESD is most prevalent during conditions of low humidity, which can be caused by heating or air conditioning.
During low humidity conditions, electrical charges naturally build up on individuals, creating static electricity.
An ESD occurs when an individual with an electrical energy build-up comes in contact with conductive
objects such as metal doorknobs, file cabinets, computer equipment, and even other individuals. The static
shock or ESD is a discharge of the electrical energy build-up from a charged individual to a lesser or non-
charged individual or object.

CAUTION:
XX
The level of electrical energy discharged from a system user or patient to an ultrasound system
can be significant enough to cause damage to the system or probes.
XX
Always perform the pre-ESD preventive procedures before using connectors marked with the
ESD warning label.
−−
Apply anti-static spray on carpets or linoleum.
−−
Use anti-static mats.
−−
Ground the product to the patient table or bed.
XX
It is highly recommended that the user be given training on ESD-related warning symbols and
preventive procedures.

1-10
 Chapter 1 Safety

EMI
Although this system has been manufactured in compliance with existing EMI (ElectroMagnetic Interference)
requirements, use of this system in the presence of an electromagnetic field can cause momentary
degradation of the ultrasound image.
If this occurs often, Samsung Medison suggests a review of the environment in which the system is being
used, to identify possible sources of radiated emissions. These emissions could be from other electrical
devices used within the same room or an adjacent room. Communication devices such as cellular phones
and pagers can cause these emissions. The existence of radios, TVs, or microwave transmission equipment
nearby can also cause interference.

CAUTION: In cases where EMI is causing disturbances, it may be necessary to relocate this system.

EMC
The testing for EMC(Electromagnetic Compatibility) of this system has been performed according to the
international standard for EMC with medical devices (IEC60601-1-2). This IEC standard was adopted in Europe
as the European norm (EN60601-1-2).

Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic emission

This product is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the
user of this product should assure that it is used in such an environment.

Emission test Compliance Electromagnetic environment -guidance

The Ultrasound System uses RF energy only for its internal

RF Emission function. Therefore, its RF emissions are very low and are
Group 1
CISPR 11 not likely to cause any interference in nearby electronic
equipment.

RF Emission
Class B
CISPR 11
The Ultrasound System is suitable for use in all establishments,
Harmonic Emission including domestic establishments and those directly
Class A
IEC 61000-3-2 connected to the public low-voltage power supply network
that supplies building used for domestic purpose.
Flicker Emission
Complies
IEC 61000-3-3

1-11
 Operation Manual

Approved Cables, Transducers and Accessories for EMC

■■ Approved Cable for Electromagnetic Compliance
Cables connected to this product may affect its emissions;
Use only the cable types and lengths listed below table.

Cable Type Length

VGA Shielded Normal

RS232C Shielded Normal
USB Shielded Normal
LAN(RJ45) Twisted pair Any
S-Video Shielded Normal
Foot Switch Shielded 2.5m
B/W Printer Unshielded Coaxial Normal
MIC Unshielded Any
Printer Remote Unshielded Any
Audio R.L Shielded Normal
VHS Shielded Normal
ECG AUX input Shielded < 3m
Parallel Shielded Normal

■■ Approved Transducer for Electromagnetic Compliance

The probe listed in ‘Chapter 9. Probes’ when used with this product, have been tested to comply with
the group1 class B emission as required by International Standard CISPR 11.

■■ Approved Accessories for Electromagnetic Compliance

Accessories used with this product may effect its emissions.

CAUTION: When connecting other customer-supplied accessories to the system, such as a remote
printer or VCR, it is the user’s responsibility to ensure the electromagnetic compatibility of the
system. Use only CISPR 11 or CISPR 22, CLASS B compliant devices.

WARNING: The use of cables, transducers, and accessories other than those specified may result in
increased emission or decreased Immunity of the Ultrasound System.

1-12
 Chapter 1 Safety

Electromagnetic
Immunity test IEC 60601 Test level Compliance level
environment -guidance

Floors should be wood,

Electrotatic concrete or ceramic tile.
±6KV Contact ±6KV Contact
discharge (ESD) If floors are covered with
synthetic material, the relat-
±8KV air ±8KV air
IEC 61000-4-2 ive humidity should be at
least 30%.

Electrical fast ±2KV ±2KV

transient/burst for power supply lines
±1KV
IEC 61000-4-4 for input/output lines
Mains power quality should
for power supply lines
be that of a typical commer-
±1KV
cial or hospital environment.
for input/output lines

Surge ±1KV differential mode ±1KV differential mode Mains power quality should
be that of a typical commer-
IEC 61000-4-5 ±2KV common mode ±2KV common mode cial or hospital environment.

<5% Uт for 0.5cycle <5% Uт for 0.5cycle

(>95% dip in Uт)
Voltage dips, short
interruptions and 40% Uт for 5 cycle
voltage variations (60% dip in Uт )
on power supply
input lines 70% Uт for 25 cycle
(30% dip in Uт)
IEC 61000-4-11
<5% Uт for 5 s
(<95% dip in Uт )
Mains power quality should
(>95% dip in Uт)
be that of a typical commer-
cial or hospital environment.
40% Uт for 5 cycle
If the user of this product
(60% dip in Uт )
requires continued operation
during power mains interrup-
70% Uт for 25 cycle
tions, it is recommended that
(30% dip in Uт)
this product be powered from
an uninterruptible power
<5% Uт for 5 s
supply or a battery.
(<95% dip in Uт )

Power frequency Power frequency magnetic

(50/60Hz) fields should be at levels
magnetic field 3 A/m 3 A/m characteristic of a typical
location in a typical commer-
IEC 61000-4-8 cial or hospital environment.

NOTE Uт is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.

1-13
 Operation Manual

IEC 60601 Compliance Electromagnetic

Immunity test
Test level level environment - guidance

Conducted RF 3 Vrms 0.01V Portable and mobile RF communications equipment

IEC 61000-4-6 150 kHz should be used no closer to any part of the
to 80MHz Ultrasound System, including cables, than the
recommended separation distance calculated from
the equation applicable to the frequency of the
transmitter.

Recommended separation distance

80MHz to 800MHZ

800MHz to 2.5GHz

Radiated RF 3 V/m 3V/m where P is the maximum output power rating of the
IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter
to 2.5GHz manufacturer and d is the recomm-ended separation
distance in meters (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as
determined by an electromagnetic site survey, a
should be less than the compliance level in each
frequency range. b
Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment
marked with the following symbol :

NOTE 1) At 80MHz and 800MHz, the higher frequency range applies.

NOTE 2) These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by
absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.

a
Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and land
mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically
with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic
site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the Ultrasound System
is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above, the Ultrasound System should be observed to
verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such
as re-orienting or relocating the Ultrasound System or using a shielded location with a higher RF shielding
effectiveness and filter attenuation.
b
Over the frequency range 150kHz to 80MHz, field strengths should be less than [V1] V/m.

1-14
 Chapter 1 Safety

Recommended separation distances between portable and mobile RF

communications equipment and the EKO 7
This product is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances
are controlled. The customer or the user of this product can help Prevent electromagnetic interference
by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF communications equipment
(transmitters) and this product as recommended below, according to the maximum output power of the
communications equipment.

Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter [m]

Rated maximum 150kHz to 80MHz 80MHz to 800MHz 800MHz to 2.5GHz

output power of
transmitter
[W]

V1=0.01Vrms E1=3 V/m E1=3V/m

0.01 35.00 0.11 0.23

0.1 110.68 0.36 0.73

1 350.00 1.16 2.33

10 1106.80 3.68 7.37

100 3500.00 11.66 23.33

For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation distance d
in meters (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where p is the
maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 1) At 80MHz and 800MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2) These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption
and reflection from structures, objects and people.

Electromagnetic environment – guidance

The Ultrasound System must be used only in a shielded location with a minimum RF shielding
effectiveness and, for each cable that enters the shielded location. Field strengths outside the shielded
location from fixed RF transmitters, as determined by an electromagnetic site survey, should be less than
3V/m.
It is essential that the actual shielding effectiveness and filter attenuation of the shielded location be
verified to assure that they meet the minimum specification.

1-15
 Operation Manual

CAUTION: If the system is connected to other customer-supplied equipment, such as a local area
network (LAN) or a remote printer, Samsung Medison cannot guarantee that the remote equipment
will work correctly in the presence of electromagnetic phenomena.

Avoiding Electromagnetic Interference

Typical interference on Ultrasound Imaging Systems varies depending on Electromagnetic phenomena.
Please refer to following table:

Imaging Mode ESD1 RF2 Power Line3

For sector imaging probes,

white radial bands or flashes
in the centerlines of the
White dots, dashes, diagonal
image.
2D lines, or diagonal lines near the
For linear imaging probes,
center of the image.
white vertical bands,
sometimes more pronounced
on the sides of the image.
Change of operating
mode, system settings, Increase in the image White dots, dashes, diagonal
M or system reset. background noise or white M lines, or increase in image
Brief flashes in the mode lines. background noise
displayed or recorded
image.
Color flashes, radial or
vertical bands, increase in Color flashes, dots, dashes, or
Color
background noise, or changes changes in the color noise level.
in color image.

Horizontal lines in the spectral Vertical lines in the spectral

Doppler display or tones, abnormal display, popping type noise in
noise in the audio, or both. the audio, or both.

ESD caused by discharging of electric charge build-up on insulated surfaces or persons.

RF energy from RF transmitting equipment such as portable phones, hand-held radios, wireless devices,
commercial radio and TV, and so on.
Conducted interference on powerlines or connected cables caused by other equipment, such as switching power
supplies, electrical controls, and natural phenomena such as lightning.

A medical device can either generate or receive electromagnetic interference. The EMC standards describe
tests for both emitted and received interference.
Samsung Medison Ultrasound System do not generate interference in excess of the referenced standards.
An Ultrasound System is designed to receive signals at radio frequency and is therefore susceptible to

1-16
 Chapter 1 Safety

interference generated by RF energy sources. Examples of other source of interference are medical device,
information technology products, and radio and television transmission towers. Tracing the source of
radiated interference can be a difficult task. Customers should consider the following in an attempt to
locate the source:
▶ Is the interference intermittent or constant?
▶ Does the interference show up only with one transducers operating at the same frequency or with
several transducer?
▶ Do two different transducer operating at the same frequency have the same problem?
▶ Is the interference present if the system is moved to a different location in the facility?
▶ The answers to these questions will help determine if the problem reside with the system or
the scanning environment. After you answer the question, contact your local Samsung Medison
customer service department.

1-17
 Operation Manual

Mechanical Safety

Moving the Equipment

WARNING: The product weighs more than 100kg. Be extra careful when transporting it. Careless
transportation of the product may result in product damage or personal injury.

■ Before transporting the product, check that the brakes on wheels are unlocked. Also, make sure to
retract the monitor arm completely so that it is secured in a stationary position.
■ Always use the handles at the back of the console and move the product slowly.

This product is designed to resist shocks. However, excessive shock, for example if the product falls over,
may cause serious damage.
If the system operates abnormally after repositioning, please contact the Samsung Medison Customer
Service Department.

The Brakes
Brakes are mounted to wheels of the console. To lock the brakes, press the top part of the brake with your
foot. To unlock them, press the part labelled OFF at the bottom of the brake with your foot.
You can use the brakes to control the movement of the product. We recommend that you lock the brakes
when using the product.

Precautions on Ramps
Always make sure that the control panel is facing the direction of movement.

WARNING: Be aware of the castors, especially when moving the system. Samsung Medison
recommends that you exercise caution when moving the product up or down ramps.

When moving the product down a ramp or resting it temporarily on a ramp, the product may tilt over
even with the brakes on depending on the direction of the product. Do not rest the product on ramps.

1-18
 Chapter 1 Safety

Safety Note
CAUTION:
XX
Never attempt to modify the product in any way.
XX
Check the operational safety when using the product after a prolonged break in service.
XX
Make sure that other objects, such as metal pieces, do not enter the system.
XX
Do not block the ventilation slots.
XX
To prevent damage to the power cord, be sure to grip the plug head – not the cord – when
unplugging.
XX
Excessive bending or twisting of cables on patient-applied parts may cause failure or intermittent
operation of the system.
XX
Improper cleaning or sterilization of a patient-applied part may cause permanent damage.

Please refer to “Chapter 8. Maintenance” for detailed information on protecting, cleaning and disinfecting the
equipment.

Safety Note for Monitor

When adjusting the height or position of the monitor, be careful of the space in the middle of the monitor
arm. Having your fingers or other body parts caught in it may result in injury.

[Figure 1.2 Safety note for monitor]

1-19
 Operation Manual

Caution for Using Control Panel

CAUTION:
XX
Do not press on the control panel with excessive force or lean against it.
XX
Do not sit on the control panel or apply too much force to it.

When adjusting the height or position of the control panel, be careful not to leave your fingers or hand in
area between the control panel and the lift - they may get trapped and hurt.

[Figure 1.3 Safety note for control panel]

1-20
 Chapter 1 Safety

Biological Safety
For more safety information on probes and biopsy, please refer to Chapter 9 'Probes.’

WARNING:
XX
Ultrasound waves may have damaging effects on cells and, therefore, may be harmful to the
patient. If there is no medical benefit, minimize the exposure time and maintain the ultrasound
wave output level at low. Please refer to the ALARA principle.
XX
Do not use the system if an error message appears on the video display indicating that a
hazardous condition exists. Note the error code, turn off the power to the system, and call your
local Samsung Medison Customer Service Department.
XX
Do not use a system that exhibits erratic or inconsistent updating. Discontinuities in the
scanning sequence are indicative of a hardware failure that should be corrected before use.
XX
The system limits the maximum contact temperature to 43 degree Celsius, and the ultrasonic
waves output observes American FDA regulations.

ALARA Principle
Guidance for the use of diagnostic ultrasound is defined by the “as low as reasonably achievable” (ALARA)
principle. The decision as to what is reasonable has been left to the judgment and insight of qualified
personnel. No set of rules can be formulated that would be sufficiently complete to dictate the correct
response for every circumstance. By keeping ultrasound exposure as low as possible, while obtaining
diagnostic images, users can minimize ultrasonic bioeffects.
Since the threshold for diagnostic ultrasound bioeffects is undetermined, it is the sonographer’s responsibility
to control the total energy transmitted into the patient. The sonographer must reconcile exposure time with
diagnostic image quality. To ensure diagnostic image quality and limit exposure time, the ultrasound system
provides controls that can be manipulated during the exam to optimize the results of the exam.
The ability of the user to abide by the ALARA principle is important. Advances in diagnostic ultrasound not
only in the technology but also in the applications of the technology, have resulted in the need for more and
better information to guide the user. The output indices are designed to provide that important information
There are a number of variables, which affect the way in which the output display indices can be used to
implement the ALARA principle. These variables include mass, body size, location of the bone relative to the
focal point, attenuation in the body, and ultrasound exposure time. Exposure time is an especially useful
variable, because the user controls it. The ability to limit the index values over time support the ALARA
principle.

1-21
 Operation Manual

Applying ALARA
The system-imaging mode used depends upon the information needed. 2D-mode and M-mode imaging
provide anatomical information, while Doppler, Power, and Color imaging provide information about
blood flow. Scanned modes, like 2D-mode, Power, or Color, disperse or scatter the ultrasonic energy
over an area, while an unscanned mode, like M-mode or Doppler, concentrates ultrasonic energy.
Understanding the nature of the imaging mode being used allows the sonographer to apply the ALARA
principle with informed judgment. The probe frequency, system set-up values, scanning techniques, and
operator experience aid the sonographer in meeting the definition of the ALARA principle.
The decision as to the amount of acoustic output is, in the final analysis, up to the system operator. This
decision must be based on the following factors: type of patient, type of exam, patient history, ease or
difficulty of obtaining diagnostically useful information, and the potential localized heating of the patient
due to probe surface temperatures. Prudent use of the system occurs when patient exposure is limited
to the lowest index reading for the shortest amount of time necessary to achieve acceptable diagnostic
results.
Although a high index reading does not mean that a bioeffect is actually occurring, a high index reading
should be taken seriously. Every effort should be made to reduce the possible effects of a high index
reading. Limiting exposure time is an effective way to accomplish this goal.
There are several system controls that the operator can use to adjust the image quality and limit the
acoustic intensity. These controls are related to the techniques that an operator might use to implement
ALARA. These controls can be divided into three categories: direct, indirect, and receiver control.

Direct Controls
Application selection and the output intensity control directly affect acoustic intensity. There are different
ranges of allowable intensity or output based on your selection. Selecting the correct range of acoustic
intensity for the application is one of the first things required during any exam. For example, peripheral
vascular intensity levels are not recommended for fetal exams. Some systems automatically select the
proper range for a particular procedure, while others require manual selection. Ultimately, the user bears
the responsibility for proper clinical use. The Samsung Medison system provides both automatic and user-
definable settings.
Output has direct impact on acoustic intensity. Once the application has been established, the output
control can be used to increase or decrease the intensity output. The output control allows you to select
intensity levels less than the defined maximum. Prudent use dictates that you select the lowest output
intensity consistent with good image quality.

1-22
 Chapter 1 Safety

Indirect Controls
The indirect controls are those that have an indirect effect on acoustic intensity. These controls affect
imaging mode, pulse repetition frequency, focus depth, pulse length, and probe selection.
The choice of imaging mode determines the nature of the ultrasound beam. 2D-mode is a scanning
mode, Doppler is a stationary or unscanned mode. A stationary ultrasound beam concentrates energy on
a single location. A moving or scanned ultrasound beam disperses the energy over a wide area and the
beam is only concentrated on a given area for a fraction of the time necessary in unscanned mode.
Pulse repetition frequency or rate refers to the number of ultrasound bursts of energy over a specific
period of time. The higher the pulse repetition frequency, the more pulses of energy in a given period of
time. Several controls affect pulse repetition frequency: focal depth, display depth, sample volume depth,
color sensitivity, number of focal zones, and sector width controls.
Focus of the ultrasound beam affects the image resolution. To maintain or increase resolution at a
different focus requires a variation in output over the focal zone. This variation of output is a function of
system optimization. Different exams require different focal depths. Setting the focus to the proper depth
improves the resolution of the structure of interest.
Pulse length is the time during which the ultrasonic burst is turned on. The longer the pulse, the greater
the time-average intensity value. The greater the time-average intensity, the greater the likelihood of
temperature increase and cavitations. Pulse length or burst length or pulse duration is the output pulse
duration in pulsed Doppler. Increasing the Doppler sample volume increases the pulse length.
Probe selection affects intensity indirectly. Tissue attenuation changes with frequency. The higher the
probe operating frequency, the greater the attenuation of the ultrasonic energy. Higher probe operating
frequencies require higher output intensity to scan at a deeper depth. To scan deeper at the same output
intensity, a lower probe frequency is required. Using more gain and output beyond a point, without
corresponding increases in image quality, can mean that a lower frequency probe is needed.

■■ Receiver Controls
Receiver controls are used by the operator to improve image quality. These controls have no effect on
output. Receiver controls only affect how the ultrasound echo is received. These controls include gain,
TGC, dynamic range, and image processing. The important thing to remember, relative to output, is that
receiver controls should be optimized before increasing output. For example; before increasing output,
optimize gain to improve image quality.

1-23
 Operation Manual

Additional Considerations
Ensure that scanning time is kept to a minimum, and ensure that only medically required scanning is
performed. Never compromise quality by rushing through an exam. A poor exam will require a follow-up,
which ultimately increases the time. Diagnostic ultrasound is an important tool in medicine, and, like any
tool, should be used efficiently and effectively.

Output Display Features

The system output display comprises two basic indices: a mechanical index and a thermal index. The
thermal index consists of the following indices: soft tissue (TIs), bone (TIb) and cranial bone (TIc). One of
these three thermal indices will be displayed at all times. Which one depends upon the system preset or
user choice, depending upon the application at hand.
The mechanical index is continuously displayed over the range of 0.0 to 1.9, in increments of 0.1.
The thermal index consists of the three indices, and only one of these is displayed at any one time.
Each probe application has a default selection that is appropriate for that combination. The TIb or TIs is
continuously displayed over the range of 0.0 to maximum output, based on the probe and application, in
increments of 0.1.
The application-specific nature of the default setting is also an important factor of index behavior. A
default setting is a system control state which is preset by the manufacturer or the operator. The system
has default index settings for the probe application. The default settings are invoked automatically by the
ultrasound system when power is turned on, new patient data is entered into the system database, or a
change in application takes place.
The decision as to which of the three thermal indices to display should be based on the following criteria:
Appropriate index for the application: TIs is used for imaging soft tissue; and TIb for a focus at or near
bone. Some factors might create artificially high or low thermal index readings e.g. presence of fluid or
bone, or the flow of blood. A highly attenuating tissue path, for example, will cause the potential for local
zone heating to be less than the thermal index displays.
Scanned modes versus unscanned modes of operation affect the thermal index. For scanned modes,
heating tends to be near the surface; for unscanned modes, the potential for heating tends to be deeper
in the focal zone.
Always limit ultrasound exposure time. Do not rush the exam. Ensure that the indices are kept to a
minimum and that exposure time is limited without compromising diagnostic sensitivity.

1-24
 Chapter 1 Safety

■■ Mechanical Index (MI) Display

Mechanical bioeffects are threshold phenomena that occur when a certain level of output is exceeded.
The threshold level varies, however, with the type of tissue. The potential for mechanical bioeffects
varies with peak pressure and ultrasound frequency. The MI accounts for these two factors. The higher
the MI value, the greater the likelihood of mechanical bioeffects occurring but there is no specific MI
value that means that a mechanical effect will actually occur. The MI should be used as a guide for
implementing the ALARA principle.

■■ Thermal Index (TI) Display

The TI informs the user about the potential for temperature increase occuring at the body surface,
within body tissue, or at the point of focus of the ultrasound beam on bone. The TI is an estimate of the
temperature increase in specific body tissues. The actual amount of any temperature rise is influenced
by factors such as tissue type, vascularity, and mode of operation etc. The TI should be used as a guide
for implementing the ALARA principle.
The bone thermal index (TIb) informs the user about potential heating at or near the focus after
the ultrasound beam has passed through soft tissue or fluid, for example, at or near second or third
trimester fetal bone.
The cranial bone thermal index (TIc) informs the user about the potential heating of bone at or near the
surface, for example, cranial bone.
The soft tissue thermal index (TIs) informs the user about the potential for heating within soft
homogeneous tissue.
You can select either TIs or TIb using the TIs/TIb selection on the Miscellaneous system setups. TIc is
displayed when you select a trans-cranial application.

■■ Mechanical and Thermal indices Display Precision and Accuracy

The Mechanical and Thermal Indices on the system are precise to 0.1 units.
The MI and TI display accuracy estimates for the system are given in the Acoustic Output Tables manual.
These accuracy estimates are based on the variability range of probes and systems, inherent acoustic
output modeling errors and measurement variability, as described below.
The displayed values should be interpreted as relative information to help the system operator achieve
the ALARA principle through prudent use of the system. The values should not be interpreted as actual
physical values investigated tissue or organs. The initial data that is used to support the output display is
derived from laboratory measurements based on the AIUM measurement standard. The measurements
are then put into algorithms for calculating the displayed output values.

1-25
 Operation Manual

Many of the assumptions used in the process of measurement and calculation are conservative in
nature. Over-estimation of actual in situ exposure, for the vast majority of tissue paths, is built into the
measurement and calculation process. For example:
The measured water tank values are de-rated using a conservative, industry standard, attenuation
coefficient of 0.3dB/cm-MHz.
Conservative values for tissue characteristics were selected for use in the TI models. Conservative values
for tissue or bone absorption rates, blood perfusion rates, blood heat capacity, and tissue thermal
conductivity were selected.
Steady state temperature rise is assumed in the industry standard TI models, and the assumption is made that
the ultrasound probe is held steady in one position long enough for steady state to be reached.
A number of factors are considered when estimating the accuracy of display values: hardware variations,
algorithm accuracy estimation and measurement variability. Variability among probes and systems
is a significant factor. Probe variability results from piezoelectric crystal efficiencies, process-related
impedance differences, and sensitive lens focusing parameter variations. Differences in the system pulse
voltage control and efficiencies are also a contributor to variability. There are inherent uncertainties in
the algorithms used for estimating acoustic output values over the range of possible system operating
conditions and pulse voltages. Inaccuracies in laboratory measurements are related to differences
in hydrophone calibration and performance, positioning, alignment and digitization tolerances, and
variability among test operators.
The conservative assumptions of the output estimation algorithms of linear propagation, at all depths,
through a 0.3dB/cm-MHz attenuated medium are not taken into account in calculation of the accuracy
estimate displayed. Neither linear propagation, nor uniform attenuation at the 0.3dB/cm-MHz rate,
occur in water tank measurements or in most tissue paths in the body. In the body, different tissues and
organs have dissimilar attenuation characteristics. In water, there is almost no attenuation. In the body,
and particularly in water tank measurements, non-linear propagation and saturation losses occur as
pulse voltages increase.
The display accuracy estimates take into account the variability ranges of probes and systems, inherent
acoustic output modeling errors, and measurement variability. Display accuracy estimates are not based
on errors in, or caused by measuring according to, the AIUM measurement standards. They are also
independent of the effects of non-linear loss on the measured values.

1-26
 Chapter 1 Safety

Control Effects - Control affecting the indices

As various system controls are adjusted, the TI and MI values may change. This will be most apparent as
the POWER control is adjusted; however, other system controls will affect the on-screen output values.

■■ Power
Power controls the system acoustic output. Two real-time output values are on the screen: a TI and a MI.
They change as the system responds to POWER adjustments.
In combined modes, such as simultaneous Color, 2D-mode and pulsed Doppler, the individual modes
each add to the total TI. One mode will be the dominant contributor to this total. The displayed MI will
be from the mode with the largest peak pressure.

2D-mode Controls
■■ 2D-mode size
Narrowing the sector angle may increase the frame rate. This action will increase the TI. Pulse
voltage may be automatically adjusted down with software controls to keep the TI below the system
maximums. A decrease in pulse voltage will decrease MI.

■■ Zoom
Increasing the zoom magnification may increase frame rate. This action will increase the TI. The number
of focal zones may also increase automatically to improve resolution. This action may change MI since
the peak intensity can occur at a different depth.

■■ Persistence
A lower persistence will decrease the TI. Pulse voltage may be automatically increased. An increase in
pulse voltage will increase MI.

■■ Focal no.
More focal zones may change both the TI and MI by changing frame rate or focal depth automatically.
Lower frame rates decrease the TI. MI displayed will correspond to the zone with the largest peak
intensity.

■■ Focus
Changing the focal depth will change the MI. Generally, higher MI values will occur when the focal
depth is near the natural focus of the transducer.

1-27
 Operation Manual

Color and Power Controls

■■ Color Sensitivity
Increasing the color sensitivity may increase the TI. More time is spent scanning for color images.
Color pulses are the dominant pulse type in this mode.

■■ Color Sector Width

Narrower color sector width will increase color frame rate and the TI will increase. The system may
automatically decrease pulse voltage to stay below the system maximum. A decrease in pulse voltage
will decrease the MI. If pulsed Doppler is also enabled then pulsed Doppler will remain the dominant
mode and the TI change will be small.

■■ Color Sector Depth

Deeper color sector depth may automatically decrease color frame rate or select a new color focal zone
or color pulse length. The TI will change due to the combination of these effects. Generally, the TI will
decrease with increased color sector depth. MI will correspond to the peak intensity of the dominant
pulse type, which is a color pulse. However, if pulsed Doppler is also enabled then pulsed Doppler will
remain the dominant mode and the TI change will be small.

■■ Scale
Using the SCALE control to increase the color velocity range may increase the TI. The system will
automatically adjust pulse voltage to stay below the system maximums. A decrease in pulse voltage will
also decrease MI.

■■ Sec Width
A narrower 2D-mode sector width in Color imaging will increase color frame rate. The TI will increase. MI
will not change. If pulsed Doppler is also enabled, then pulsed Doppler will remain as the primary mode
and the TI change will be small.

M-mode and Doppler Controls

■■ Speed
M-mode and Doppler sweep speed adjustments will not affect the MI. When M-mode sweep speed
changes, TI changes.

1-28
 Chapter 1 Safety

■■ Simultaneous and Update Methods

Use of combination modes affects both the TI and MI through the combination of pulse types. During
simultaneous mode, the TI is additive. During auto-update and duplex, the TI will display the dominant
pulse type. The displayed MI will be from the mode with the largest peak pressure.

■■ Sample Volume Depth

When Doppler sample volume depth is increased the Doppler PRF may automatically decrease. A
decrease in PRF will decrease the TI. The system may also automatically decrease the pulse voltage to
remain below the system maximum. A decrease in pulse voltage will decrease MI.

Doppler, CW, M-mode, and Color Imaging Controls

When a new imaging mode is selected, both the TI and the MI will change to default settings. Each
mode has a corresponding pulse repetition frequency and maximum intensity point. In combined or
simultaneous modes, the TI is the sum of the contribution from the modes enabled and MI is the MI for
the focal zone and mode with the largest derated intensity. If a mode is turned off and then reselected,
the system will return to the previously selected settings.

■■ Probe
Each probe model available has unique specifications for contact area, beam shape, and center
frequency. Defaults are initialized when you select a probe. Samsung Medison factory defaults vary with
probe, application, and selected mode. Defaults have been chosen below the FDA limits for intended
use.

■■ Depth
An increase in 2D-mode depth will automatically decrease the 2D-mode frame rate. This would
decrease the TI. The system may also automatically choose a deeper 2D-mode focal depth. A change of
focal depth may change the MI. The MI displayed is that of the zone with the largest peak intensity.

■■ Application
Acoustic output defaults are set when you select an application. Samsung Medison factory defaults vary
with probe, application, and mode. Defaults have been chosen below the FDA limits for intended use.

1-29
 Operation Manual

Related Guidance Documents

For more information about ultrasonic bioeffects and related topics refer to the following;
▶ AIUM Report, January 28, 1993, “Bioeffects and Safety of Diagnostic Ultrasound”
▶ Bioeffects Considerations for the Safety of Diagnostic Ultrasound, J Ultrasound Med., Sept. 1998: Vol. 7,
No. 9 Supplement
▶ Acoustic Output Measurement Standard for Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment. (AIUM, NEMA. 1998)
▶ Acoustic Output Labeling Standard for Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment (AIUM, 1998)
▶ Second Edition of the AIUM Output Display Standard Brochure, Dated March 10, 1994. (A copy of this
document is shipped with each system.)
▶ Information for Manufacturer Seeking Marketing Clearance of Diagnostic Ultrasound Systems and
Transducers. FDA. September 1997. FDA.
▶ Standard for Real-Time Display of Thermal and Mechanical Acoustic Output Indices on Diagnostic
Ultrasound Equipment. (Revision 1, AIUM, NEMA. 1998)
▶ WFUMB. Symposium on Safety of Ultrasound in Medicine: Conclusions and Recommendations on
Thermal and Non-Thermal Mechanisms for Biological Effects of Ultrasound, Ultrasound in Medicine
and Biology, 1998: Vol. 24, Supplement1.

Acoustic Output and Measurement

Since the first usage of diagnostic ultrasound, the possible human biological effects (bioeffects) of
ultrasound exposure have been studied by various scientific and medical institutions. In October 1987, the
American Institute of Ultrasound in Medicine(AIUM) ratified a report prepared by its Bioeffects Committee
(Bioeffects Considerations for the Safety of Diagnostic Ultrasound, J Ultrasound Med., Sept. 1988: Vol.7, No.9
Supplement), sometimes referred to as the Stowe Report, which reviewed available data on possible effects
of ultrasound exposure. Another report “Bioeffects and Safety of Diagnostic Ultrasound,” dated January 28,
1993 provides more up to date information.
The acoustic output for this system has been measured and calculated in accordance with the December
1985 “510(K) Guide for Measuring and Reporting Acoustic Output of Diagnostic Ultrasound Medical
Devices,” except that the hydrophone meets the requirements of “Acoustic Output Measurement Standard
for Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment” (NEMA UD 2-1992)

1-30
 Chapter 1 Safety

In Situ, Derated, and Water Value Intensities

All intensity parameters are measured in water. Since water does not absorb acoustic energy, these water
measurements represent a worst case value. Biological tissue does absorb acoustic energy. The true
value of the intensity at any point depends on the amount and type of tissue and the frequency of the
ultrasound that passes through the tissue. The intensity value in the tissue, In Situ, has been estimated
using the following formula:
In Situ = Water [ ]

where: In Situ = In Situ Intensity Value

Water = Water Value Intensity
e = 2.7183
a = Attenuation Factor
Tissue a(dB/cm-MHz)
Brain .53
Heart .66
Kidney .79
Liver .43
Muscle .55
l = skin line to measurement depth (cm)
f = Center frequency of the transducer/system/mode combination(MHz)
Since the ultrasonic path during an examination is likely to pass through varying lengths and types of
tissue, it is difficult to estimate the true In Situ intensity. An attenuation factor of 0.3 is used for general
reporting purpose; therefore, the In Situ value which is commonly reported uses the formula:

In Situ (derated) = Water [ ]

Since this value is not the true In Situ intensity, the term “derated” is used.
The maximum derated and the maximum water values do not always occur at the same operating
condition; therefore, the reported maximum water and derated values may not be related to the In
Situ (derated) formula. Take for example a multi-zone array transducer that has maximum water value
intensities in its deepest zone: the same transducer may have its largest derated intensity in one if its
shallowest focal zones.

1-31
 Operation Manual

Acoustic Output and Measurement

The terms and symbols used in the acoustic output tables are defined in the following paragraphs.

ISPTA.3 The derated spatial-peak temporal-average intensity (milliwatts per square centimeter).
ISPPA.3 The derated spatial-peak pulse-average intensity (watts per square centimeter). The value of
IPA.3 at the position of global maximum MI (IPA.3@MI) may be reported instead of ISPPA.3 if
the global maximum MI is reported.
MI The Mechanical Index. The value of MI at the position of ISPPA.3, (MI@ISPPA.3) may be
reported instead of MI (global maximum value) if ISPPA.3 is 190W/cm2
Pr.3 The derated peak rarefactional pressure (megapascals) associated with the transmit pattern
giving rise to the reported MI value.
WO The ultrasonic power (milliwatts). For the operating condition giving rise to ISPTA.3, WO is the
total time-average power;. For operating conditions subject to reporting under ISPPA.3, WO
is the ultrasonic power associated with the transmit pattern giving rise to the value reported
under ISPPA.3
Fc The center frequency (MHz). For MI and ISPPA.3, Fc is the center frequency associated with
the transmit pattern giving rise to the global maximum value of the respective parameter.
For ISPTA.3, for combined modes involving beam types of unequal center frequency, Fc is
defined as the overall ranges of center frequencies of the respective transmit patterns.
ZSP The axial distance at which the reported parameter is measured (centimeters).
x-6,y-6 are respectively the in-plane (azimuth) and out-of-plane (elevation) -6 dimensions in the x-y
plane where ZSP is found (centimeters).
PD The pulse duration (microseconds) associated with the transmit pattern giving rise to the
reported value of the respective parameter.
PRF The pulse repetition frequency (Hz) associated with the transmit pattern giving rise to the
reported value of the respective parameter.
EBD The entrance beam dimensions for the azimuth and elevation planes (centimeters).
EDS The entrance dimensions of the scan for the azimuth and elevation planes (centimeters).

1-32
 Chapter 1 Safety

Acoustic Measurement Precision and Uncertainty

The Acoustic Measurement Precision and Acoustic Measurement Uncertainty are described below.

Quantity Precision Total Uncertainty

PII.3 (derated pulse intensity integral) 3.2 % +21 % to - 24 %

Wo (acoustic power) 6.2 % +/- 19 %
Pr.3 (derated rarefaction pressure) 5.4 % +/- 15 %
Fc (center frequency) <1% +/- 4.5 %

■■ Systematic Uncertainties.
For the pulse intensity integral, derated rarefaction pressure Pr.3, center frequency and pulse duration,
the analysis includes considerations of the effects on accuracy of:
Hydrophone calibration drift or errors.
Hydrophone / Amp frequency response.
Spatial averaging.
Alignment errors.
Voltage measurement accuracy, including.
▶ Oscilloscope vertical accuracy.
▶ Oscilloscope offset accuracy.
▶ Oscilloscope clock accuracy.
▶ Oscilloscope Digitization rates.
▶ Noise.

The systematic uncertainties Acoustic power measurements using a Radiation Force are measured
through the use of calibrated NIST acoustic power sources.
We also refer to a September 1993 analysis done by a working group of the IEC technical committee 87
and prepared by K. Beissner, as a first supplement to IEC publication 1161.
The document includes analysis and discussion of the sources of error / measurement effects due to:
Balance system calibration.
Absorbing (or reflecting) target suspension mechanisms.
Linearity of the balance system.
Extrapolation to the moment of switching the ultrasonic transducer (compensation for ringing and
thermal drift).
Target imperfections.
Absorbing (reflecting) target geometry and finite target size.
Target misalignment.

1-33
 Operation Manual

Ultrasonic transducer misalignment.

Water temperature.
Ultrasonic attenuation and acoustic streaming.
Coupling or shielding foil properties.
Plane-wave assumption.
Environmental influences.
Excitation voltage measurement.
Ultrasonic transducer temperature.
Effects due to nonlinear propagation and saturation loss.
The overall findings of the analysis give a rough Acoustic Power accuracy figure of +/- 10% for the
frequency range of 1 - 10 MHz.

1-34
 Chapter 1 Safety

Environmental Protection
CAUTION:
XX
For disposing of the system or accessories that have come to the end of their lifespan, contact
the vendor or follow appropriate disposal procedures.   
XX
You are responsible for complying with the relevant regulations for disposing of wastes.
XX
The lithium ion battery used in the product must be replaced by a Samsung Medison service
engineer or an authorized dealer.

Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment

This symbol is applied in the European Union and other European countries.

This symbol on the product indicates that this product shall not be treated as household waste. Instead
it shall be handed over to the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic
equipment. By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will help prevent potential negative
consequences for the environment and human health, which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate
waste handling of this product. The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural resources. For more
detailed information about recycling of this product, please contact your local city office, your electrical and
electronic waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product.

1-35
Chapter 2
Introduction

‹‹Specifications................................................... 2-3

‹‹Product Configuration .................................. 2-5

Monitor ........................................................................................2-7
Control Panel..............................................................................2-9
Console.......................................................................................2-16
Peripheral Devices ................................................................2-18
Probe...........................................................................................2-20
ECG Lead ...................................................................................2-21
Accessories................................................................................2-23
Optional Functions................................................................2-24
 Chapter 2 Introduction

Specifications
Height: 1325mm (with monitor)
Width: 532mm
Physical Dimensions
Depth: 981mm
Weight: more than 105kg (with monitor)
2D imaging mode
M imaging mode
Color Doppler Imaging (CDI) mode
Power Doppler Imaging (PDI) mode
Directional Power Doppler Imaging (DPDI) mode
Tissue Doppler Imaging Mode
Tissue Doppler Wave Mode
Imaging modes
Pulse Wave (PW) Spectral Doppler imaging mode
Continuous Wave (CW) Spectral Doppler imaging mode
Dual modes
Quad modes
Combined modes
Simultaneous mode
Zoom
Gray Scale 256 (8 bits)
Transmit focusing, maximum of eight points (four points simultaneously selectable)
Focusing
Digital dynamic receive focusing (continuous)
Phased Array
P2-4BA, P3-8CA, P4-12
Linear Array
L3-8, L5-13IS
Probes Curved Linear Array
(Type BF / IPX7) C1-4EC, C2-6IC, EV4-9/10ED
TEE
MPT13-7, MMPT3-7
CW
CW2.0,CW4.0
Probe connections 4 probe connectors (including one CW probe connector)
Monitor 19 inch LCD monitor
ECG Type BF
VHS and SVHS VCR left and right audio
Rear Panel B/W printer video and remote control
Input / Output VGA monitor
Connections USB
LAN

2-3
 Operation Manual

Maximum 5400 frames for CINE memory

Image Storage Maximum 8192 Lines for LOOP memory
Image filing system
Obstetrics, Gynecology, Abdomen, Cardiac, Pediatric, Vascular, Small Parts, TCD,
Applications
Contrast
Electrical Parameters 100-120V/200-240VAC, 10A, 50/60Hz
Measurement Cardiac, Vascular, Fetal Echo, TCD, OB, Gynecology
Packages * Refer the Chapter 5 for additional information
TGC control
Mode-independent gain control
Acoustic power control (adjustable)
Signal processing Dynamic aperture
(Pre-processing) Dynamic apodization
Dynamic range control (adjustable)
Image view area control
M-mode sweep speed control
Frame average
Edge Enhancement / Blurring
Signal processing Gamma-scale windowing
(Post-processing) Image orientation (left/right and up/down, rotation)
White on black/black on white
Zoom
Trackball operation of multiple cursors
2D mode: Linear measurements and area measurements using elliptical approximation
Measurement or trace
M mode: Continuous readout of distance, time, and slope rate
Doppler mode: Velocity and trace
VCR
Video Page Printer
Color Video Page Printer
USB Video Printer
USB Color Video Printer
Auxiliary
Inkjet Printer
Laser Printer
Foot Switch (IPX1)
USB Flash Memory Media
Monitor
User Interface English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Russian, Chinese
Operating: 700hPa to 1060hPa
Pressure Limits
Storage: 700hPa to 1060hPa
Operating: 30% to 75%
Humidity Limits
Storage & Shipping: 20% to 90%
Operating: 10 OC ~ 35OC
Temperature Limits
Storage & Shipping: -25OC ~ 60OC

2-4
 Chapter 2 Introduction

Product Configuration
This Product consists of the monitor, the control panel, the console, the peripheral devices, and the probes.
① Monitor
② Monitor arm
③ Keyboard
④ Control panel
⑤ Lift
⑥ Probe holder
⑦ DVD drive and USB port
⑧ Speaker
⑨ ECG port
⑩ Probe port
⑪ CW probe port
⑫ Air filter
⑬ Wheel

[Figure 2.1 Front of the EKO 7]

2-5
 Operation Manual

① Handle
② Storage compartments
③ Ventilation
④ USB and LAN ports
⑤ Rear panel
⑥ Cable holder
⑦ Power connection part

[Figure 2.2 Back of the EKO 7]

2-6
 Chapter 2 Introduction

Monitor
Ultrasound images and other information are displayed on the color LCD monitor.

Monitor Display
The monitor displays ultrasound images, operation menus and a variety of other information. The screen
is divided into five areas: ① Title area, ② Measurement Menu area ③ Image Area, ④ Thumbnail area, and
⑤ User Information area.

3
2

5
[Figure 2.3 Monitor Display]

2-7
 Operation Manual

■■ Title Area
Displays patient name, hospital name, application, frame rate and depth, probe information, acoustic
output information, and date and time.

■■ Preview and Measurement Menu Area

Displays the selected thumbnail image. During measurement, displays the measurement menus.

■■ Image Area
Displays ultrasound images. Image information, annotation, and measurement information are also
displayed.

■■ Thumbnail Area
The images saved by pressing the Acquire button are displayed. Click a thumbnail to enlarge. Up to 9
images are displayed.
In BodyMarker mode, body markers are displayed

■■ User Information Area

The user information area provides a variety of information necessary for system use e.g. current system
status, image information, selectable items, etc.

Displaying the current status of the system

Tips!
: Shows the LAN connection status.

2-8
 Chapter 2 Introduction

Control Panel
The system can be controlled by using the control panel.

[Figure 2.4 Control Panel]

The control panel consists of a keyboard, soft menus, buttons, dials, dial-buttons, a slide, and a trackball.
The dial-button can be used both as a dial and a button.

2-9
 Operation Manual

OB/GYN Control Panel

Tips!
If you selected the OB/GYN Measurement option with this product, the control panel’s layout is as
shown below. If you wish to use a different control panel layout, contact Samsung Medison service
department.

[Figure 2.5 OB/GYN Control Panel]

2-10
 Chapter 2 Introduction

Functions of the Control Panel

The following are the descriptions and instructions for the controls on the control panel. For more
information on controls with multiple functions, see Chapter 3 and later in this manual.

Button Turns the system on/off.

On/Off

Displays the Patient Information screen for patient selection and information
Patient Button
entry.
Displays the Probe Selection screen to select or change probes
Probe Button
and applications.
Displays the menu to select or change applications and presets on the soft menu
Preset Button
screen.
End Exam Button Finishes the exam of the currently selected patient and resets the related data.

Displays the Report screen that shows the measurement results of the current
Report Button
application and other information.
Protocol Button Displays the Protocol screen with which the StressEcho can be used.

Review Button Runs SONOVIEW which is the image filing program.

Allows you to select the Depth or Focus function. The button function is changed
Depth / each time you press this button. The default is Depth.
Dial-button
Focus Depth: Adjusts the scanning depth of the image.
Focus: Moves focus onto the area to observe.
Press this button to set Write Zoom.
Zoom Dial-button
Rotate the dial-button to adjust zoom.
Baseline Dial Adjusts the baseline in Doppler mode.

Scale Dial Adjusts the speed of blood flow or frequency range in Doppler mode.
Adjusts the angle of sample volume in Spectral Doppler mode. It is also used to
Angle Dial
adjust the indicator angle or the probe angle for a body marker.
Pointer Button Displays an arrow-shaped pointer on the screen.
Press this button to turn the Quick Scan function on. The ‘Q Scan’ mark is displayed
on the top of the image. It can be used only in specific applications of specific
Q Scan Button
probes.
Press the Q Scan or Exit button to exit Q Scan mode
Saves an image or a report displayed on the screen in the system database.
Acquire Button
Saves a video in the Live status and a still image in the Freeze status.

Record Button Records image using the VCR connected to the system.

Print Button Prints image on the screen using the printer connected to the system.

2-11
 Operation Manual

Freeze Button Pauses/Resumes scanning.

Press this dial-button to start/stop Power Doppler mode.

PD Dial-button
Rotate this dial-button to adjust gain.
Press this dial-button to start/stop TDI mode.
TDI Dial-button
Rotate this dial-button to adjust gain.
Press this dial-button to start/stop Color Doppler mode.
Color Dial-button
Rotate this dial-button to adjust gain.
Press this dial-button to start 2D mode. In multi-image mode, this button changes
2D Dial-button the screen to single mode.
Rotate this dial-button to adjust gain.
Press this dial-button to start/stop PW Spectral Doppler mode.
PW Dial-button
Rotate this dial-button to adjust gain.

Press this dial-button to start/stop CW Spectral Doppler mode.

CW Dial-button Rotate this dial-button to adjust gain.
This dial-button can be only used with the Phased Array or Static CW probe.

Press this dial-button to start/stop M mode.

M Dial-button
Rotate this dial-button to adjust gain.
Carries out the Set or Exit function.
- Set: Selects an item or value using the trackball or changes the function of the
Button
trackball
Set / Exit
- Exit: Exits the currently used function and returns to the previous function.

Button Starts the Trace function which is one of the basic measurements.
Trace

Button Starts to measure distance, circumference, area, and volume.

Caliper

Switches image to the Panning status. If you press this button in Spectral Doppler
mode, you enter D only mode.
Button
If you press this button while measuring distance, you can change the beginning
Update
or end point.

Deletes text, Indicator, body marker, and measurement result, etc. displayed on an
Button
Clear
image.

Button Starts measurements by application.

Calculator
Trackball Trackball Moves the cursor on the screen and scrolls through CINE images.
Adjusts TGC values for each depth using 8 slides. TGC stands for Time Gain
TGC Slide
Compensation.

2-12
 Chapter 2 Introduction

CAUTION: Too large a difference in the gain value settings of adjacent TGC slides may lead to the
generation of stripes in an image.

■■ Soft Menu
Consists of the Soft Menu screen and soft menu dial-buttons. On the Soft Menu screen, the functions
available for the current situation are displayed. To select or change a soft menu item, use dial-buttons
[1] to [6] at the bottom on the Soft Menu screen.

2 3

[Figure 2.6 Soft Menu]

Using Soft Menu dial-buttons

Tips!
Depending on the situation, a Soft menu dial-button can be used to access items in both sections.
Each press of the soft menu dial-button selects the top and bottom sections in turn.
XX
① The item being used is highlighted with borders.
XX
② Press the dial-button to turn the function on or off.
XX
③ Rotate the dial-button to select a value.

■■ Keyboard
The keyboard is used to type in text.

[Figure 2.7 Keyboard]

2-13
 Operation Manual

Setup Displays the Setup screen.

F1

ECG Displays the ECG menu on the Soft Menu screen.

F2

Starts Text mode. But if the check box is selected in Setup> Utility > Quick
Text
F3 Text, you can enter text without pressing this button.

Indicator Starts Indicator mode.

F4

BodyMarker Starts BodyMarker mode.

F5

Set to Single, Dual, or Quad. The button function changes sequentially

each time it is pressed, to Dual → Quad → Single.
▶ Dual: Switches to Dual mode to compare two images of different
Single / Dual / Quad diagnosis modes on the screen.
▶ Quad: Switches to Quad mode to compare four images of different
F6
diagnosis modes on the screen.
▶ Single: Switches to Single mode in which only one diagnosis mode
is available.

Select Active Window Changes the screen activated in Dual or Quad mode.
F7

Utility Displays the Utility menu on the Soft Menu screen.

F8

Displays a menu allowing you to play recorded images on the Soft Menu
VCR
F9 screen.

Help Displays the Help Manual on the screen.

F10

Changes the current soft menu in Combined mode. Each press changes
Space Bar the current soft menu to the soft menu of the other diagnosis mode
being used in the current Combined mode.

2-14
 Chapter 2 Introduction

 and  buttons
Tips!
You can use the dual mode with  and  buttons.

 button  button
Starting the dual mode (The Starting the dual mode (The
Not in dual mode
active window is left). active window is right)

If the active window is left, If the active window is left,

screen is changed to single
mode.
In dual mode
If the active window is right,
system changes the active
window to left.
system changes the active
window to right.
If the active window is right,
screen is changed to single
mode.

Adjusting the Control Panel

CAUTION:
XX
Do not apply excessive force to the control panel.
XX
Use the handle at the back of the body when moving the product.

■■ Adjusting to the right and left

Hold the handle of the control panel and move it carefully to the right or left.

■■ Adjusting the height

Press the lever on the handle of the control panel and move it carefully up or down.

2-15
 Operation Manual

Console
The console consists of two parts – the inner unit and the outer unit. The interior of the console mainly
contains devices that produce ultrasound images. On the exterior of the console are various connectors,
probe holders, storage compartments, handles, wheels, etc.

Rear Panel
A monitor and other peripheral devices like printer, VCR, etc. are connected via the rear panel at the back
of the system.

① S-VHS port (I/O): Connects the VCR in S-VHS mode.

② VHS port (I/O): Connects the VCR in VHS mode.
③ Audio port (I/O): Used to input and output audio signals
1 ④ Microphone port (Input): Connect a microphone to this
port.
S-VHS S-VHS
⑤ Print Remote port (Output): Connect an echo printer to
2 this port for remote printing.
VHS VHS ⑥ B/W printer port (Output): Connect an echo printer to
3 this port.

AUDIO/L AUDIO/L ⑦ DVI port (Output): Outputs digital signals to the

monitor.
⑧ Foot switch port: Connect a foot switch to this port.]
AUDIO/L AUDIO/L

DVI 5
R.G.B 7 PRINT
REMOTE
PRINTER

6
8
B/W

[Figure 2.8 Rear Panel]

2-16
 Chapter 2 Introduction

Power Connection Part

The power connection part is located at the bottom on the rear panel.

2
6

3 5

[Figure 2.9 Power Connection Part]

① Power Inlet: For the power cable to connect to external power

② Fuse holder: For the inlet fuse
③ Input rating change switch (Outlet): Selects the input power.
④ Power Outlet (Input): The part to which power is provided from the internal power device of the
product.
⑤ Output rating change switch: Select the output power.
⑥ Power switch: Supplies or blocks power to the entire system.

Probe Holder
A probe holder is mounted at the left and right side of the control panel.

2-17
 Operation Manual

Peripheral Devices

NOTE: Refer to the operation manual of peripheral device about its operating.

Internal Peripheral Devices

These are peripheral devices mounted in the system.

■■ DVD-Multi
DVD+RW , DVD-RW, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-ROM

■■ Hard Disc Drive

500 Gbytes.

External Peripheral Devices

These are peripheral devices that can be connected for use when needed and are connected via the USB
port located at the rear panel.

CAUTION: When using a peripheral device from a USB port, always turn the power off before
connecting/disconnecting the device. Connection/discon-nection of USB devices during power-on
may lead to malfunction of the system and USB devices.

NOTE:
XX
When remove the removable disk, use Utility > Storage manager.
XX
USB ports are located both on the front panel and the rear panel of the console.
We recommend that you connect USB storage devices (External USB HDD, flash memory media,
etc.) to the ports on the front panel and other USB peripheral devices to the rear panel for added
convenience.

The following products are recommended:

■■ Video Cassette Recorder (VCR)

Panasonic MD835, SONY DVO-1000MD, JVC BD-X201

2-18
 Chapter 2 Introduction

■■ Video Page printer

▶ Color : Mitsubishi CP91W, SONY UP-20, SONY UP-25MD

▶ Black and White : Mitsubishi P93WM, SONY UP-897MD

■■ USB Video printer

▶ Color : Mitsubishi CP-30DW, SONY UP-D21MD, SONY UP-D23MD, SONY UP-D25MD

▶ Black and Whiite : Mitsubishi P93DW, Mitsubishi P95DW, SONY UP-D897

CAUTION:
XX
You must install a Microsoft Windows XP™ or above (English) compatible printer and driver.
Contact Samsung Medison Customer Service Center for inquiries about printer driver installation.
XX
When connecting the printer, ensure that the printer is configured under Microsoft Windows™
or system setup and has been chosen as the default printer.
XX
Please check the port used in printer before connecting. Printers should be connected to the
Printer port while the USB printer connected to the USB port.

■■ USB to RS-232C Serial Cable

USB to Serial (RS-232C) Converter with FTDI Chipset (FTDI FT232BM Compatible)

NOTE: For more information about the Open Line Transfer, refer to `Chapter 5. Measurements and
Calculations’.

■■ Foot Switch
Set the function of the foot switch Setup > Peripherals > Foot Switch; Freeze, Update, Record, Print, or
Store .

■■ Others
Flash Memory media

NOTE:
XX
If you use the USB 1.1 flash memory, the system cannot recognize it. In the case of this, delete
the flash memory from the console and quip again.
XX
Regarding file formats that are not ordinarily saved: Please check first to see if it is possible to
save the file format on a desktop PC before trying to save the file on a Flash Memory.

2-19
 Operation Manual

Probe
Probes are devices that generate ultrasound waves and process reflected wave data for the purpose of image
formation.

NOTE: For more information, refer to `Chapter 9 Probes’.

Connecting probes
Be sure to connect or disconnect probes when the power is off to ensure the safety of the system and the
probes.
1. Equip probes to the probe connectors on the front panel of the system. A maximum of three probes can
be connected at one time. The CW probe should only be connected to its own connector.
2. Turn the connector-locking handle clockwise.

[Figure 2.10 Probe Connector]

2-20
 Chapter 2 Introduction

ECG Lead
ECG Cable
AHA (USA) IEC (Europe,Asia,ROW)

Color code Label Color code Label

White RA Red R
Black LA Yellow L
Green RL Black N

RL L
LA N
RA R

RA LA R L

RL N

[Figure 2.11 ECG Cable]

2-21
 Operation Manual

[Figure 2.12 ECG Cable Connection]

2-22
 Chapter 2 Introduction

Accessories
An accessory box containing the items below is supplied with the product.

CAUTION: Main cord set, separately certified according to the relevant standards, is to be used
when supplied to EU and USA/CAN.

NOTE: Accessories can be different according to the country.

[Figure 2.13 Accessories]

2-23
 Operation Manual

Optional Functions
This product has the following optional functions:

▶DICOM ▶Stressecho

▶Spatial Compound ▶Strain

▶Dynamic MR+ ▶OB/GYN/Abdomen Measurement

▶AutoIMT
For further information about optional functions, please refer to the relevant chapters in this manual.

2-24
Chapter 3
Starting Diagnosis

‹‹Power Supply................................................... 3-3

Powering On...............................................................................3-3
Powering Off..............................................................................3-3

‹‹Probes & Applications.................................... 3-4

Probe Selection and Application........................................3-5
Changing Application.............................................................3-5
Editing Probe Preset Values..................................................3-5

‹‹Patient Information........................................ 3-7

Patient Information for Application..................................3-9
Finding Patient Information...............................................3-16
Managing Patient Exams.....................................................3-18
Reviewing Measurements...................................................3-25
 Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis

Power Supply
Boot the system for use.

CAUTION: Make sure to connect the probe and peripheral devices that will be used before
powering on the system. If you attempt to connect them during system use, it may lead to patient
injury or fatal damage to the console.

Powering On
Press the On/Off button when the power is off. Booting begins, and the product logo appears on the screen.
When booting is completed, the 2D mode screen appears in End Exam status.

CAUTION: Before starting the diagnosis, you must register the patient information.

NOTE:
XX
The product should be turned on about 10 seconds after the power switch at the back of the
product is turned on.
XX
During system booting, do not press any key on the keyboard. It may cause product
malfunction.

Powering Off
Press the On/Off button while using the system.

CAUTION: If you hold down the On/Off button for five seconds or longer, the product power is
turned off forcibly. This may cause hard disk damage.

3-3
 Operation Manual

Probes & Applications

Before scanning, select a probe and an application.

CAUTION: Please refer to Chapter 9 “Probes” for more information about the probes supported by
this system.

Press the Probe button on the control panel and then the Probe Selection screen will appear. In this window,
you can select or change probes and applications and edit probe presets.

[Figure 3.1 Probe Selection]

[Figure 3.2 Probe Selection – Softmenu]

3-4
 Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis

Probe Selection and Application

1. Select a probe and an application on the screen by using the trackball and the Set button.
2. Press the [5] OK dial-button on the softmenu to make a selection. Press the [6] Cancel dial-button on the
softmenu to cancel a selection.

Selecting a probe with a softmenu button

Tips!
Press a softmenu button for the probe that you want.

Changing Application
1. After checking the currently selected probe, select an application using the trackball and Set button.
2. Press the [5] Ok dial-button on the softmenu. Press the [6] Cancel dial-button on the softmenu to cancel
a selection.

Editing Probe Preset Values

The probe settings are preset with optimal values for each application. However, if needed, you can change
the preset values as follows:

1. After checking the currently selected probe and application, change the probe settings using the
trackball and Set button under Preset.
▶ A userset such as User1 and User2 can be selected for each setting. Usersets are available under
Preset.

Userset
Tips!
If user presets are specified as User 1, User 2, etc., the specified name will appear in the title area.
For example, if the Cardiac application along with the preset User1 is selected, ‘Cardiac/User1’ will
be displayed in the title area.

2. Press the [5] Ok dial-button on the softmenu. Press the [6] Cancel dial-button on the softmenu to cancel
a selection.

3-5
 Operation Manual

Changing probe settings with the Preset button

Tips!

[Figure 3.3 Preset– Softmenu]

1. Press the Preset button on the control panel. The current probe settings are shown in the
Softmenu.
2. Rotate the [1] - [3] dial-button on the softmenu to select desired settings.
3. Apply the selected settings to the system.

−− Press the softmenu dial-button [1] App. Load to apply the selected application to the system.
−− Press the softmenu dial-button [3] Pre. Load to apply the selected preset to the system.

NOTE: To change the value for presets, press Preset. Refer to ‘Chapter 7. Utilities’ for details.

3-6
 Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis

Patient Information
Press the Patient button on the control panel and the Patient Information screen will appear on the screen.
In this screen, you can enter, search, or change patient information. Patient information includes basic
information such as the patient ID, name, DOB, and gender, together with additional information for
applications.

NOTE: The ID and name fields are required.

Entering Basic Patient Data

You can enter or change basic patient data at the top of the Patient Information screen. Use the trackball
and the Set button to select the desired field.

[Figure 3.4 The Patient Information]

3-7
 Operation Manual

■■ ID
Enter a patient ID.
▶▶To enter it manually, enter an ID in the ID field.
▶▶To enter it automatically, select Auto ID Creation and click New. The icon is changed to .
▶▶If you enter an ID that exists already, the icon next to the ID field is changed to .

■■ Name
Enter patient’s full name. The name that you have entered will appear in the title area and reports.
▶▶Last Name: Enter the patient’s last name.
▶▶First Name: Enter the patient’s first name.
▶▶Middle Name: Enter the patient’s middle name.

■■ Representation
Specify how the names of Asian patients, including Korean, Chinese and Japanese are displayed.
▶▶Roman: Type in Roman letters.
▶▶Ideographic: Type in ideographic letters.
▶▶Phonetic: Type in phonetic letters.

NOTE:
XX
This button appears on the screen only in products that support Asian patient names.
XX
For information on specifying the order or the way in which names are displayed, refer to ‘Screen
Display Settings’ in Chapter 7. ‘Utilities’ to set an order or method for displaying a name.

■■ Birth
Enter the patient’s birth date in the specified format.

■■ Age
Enter the patient’s age in “yy-mm” format. When a birth date is specified in the Birth field, this
information is automatically calculated and displayed.

■■ Gender
Select the patient’s gender.

■■ Accession
When viewing the worklist for a patient via the DICOM server, this information is automatically filled.

3-8
 Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis

Patient Information for Application

In Study Information, enter additional patient information or change the existing patient information
required for a diagnosis.

1. In the Patient Information screen, press the Study Information tab.

2. In Category, select an application.
3. Enter additional information required for a diagnosis.

Clicking Clear Measure deletes all existing measurements entered.

General
In Category, select General. Enter additional information. The items in General are also included in the
patient information screen for other applications.

■■ Height
Enter the patient’s height in Inches (in.) or Centimetres (cm). Click the unit button to change the unit.
When the unit is changed, the entered number is automatically recalculated and displayed in the
changed unit.

■■ Weight
Enter the patient’s weight in Ounces (oz), Pounds (lb) or Kilograms (Kg). Click the unit to change it.

■■ BSA
When height and weight are entered, BSA (Body Surface Area) is automatically calculated and
displayed.

■■ HR
Enter a heart rate.

■■ BP
Enter systolic/diastolic pressure (blood pressure).

3-9
 Operation Manual

■■ Diag. Physician
Enter the name of the physician who diagnosed the patient. When there is more than one physician
available, you can use the combo button to make a selection.

Typing in Korean, Japanese or Chinese

Tips!
Diag. Physician, Ref. Physician, Sonographer, Description and Indication can be entered in Korean,
Japanese or Chinese. Choose the desired language by using the [6] Language dial-button on the
softmenu.

■■ Ref. Physician
Enter the name of the reference physician. When there is more than one physician available, you can
use the combo button to make a selection.

■■ Sonographer
Enter the name of the sonographer who scanned the patient. When there is more than one
sonographer available, you can use the combo button to make a selection.

■■ Description
Enter a description of the diagnosis. If a description is entered, it can be searched for and viewed under
Description in SONOVIEW.

[Figure 3.5 Study Information - General]

3-10
 Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis

OB
Enter the obstetrical information.

LMP
„„
Enter the last menstrual period for a patient. You can enter it manually or have it automatically
calculated and displayed with the GA entered.

GA (LMP)
„„
Indicates the gestational age of a patient. You can enter it manually or have it automatically
calculated and displayed with the LMP entered.

EDD (LMP)
„„
With the LMP or GA entered, EDD (expected date of delivery) is calculated and displayed.

Calculating EDD (LMP)

Tips!
EDD can be calculated by entering LMP or GA.
XX
When LMP is entered: GA and EDD are automatically calculated and displayed on the screen.
XX
When GA is entered: LMP and EDD are automatically calculated and displayed on the screen.

Estab. Due Date

„„
Enter the expected delivery date in the prescribed format. Once the expected delivery date is
entered, LMP, GA (LMP), and EDD (LMP) are automatically calculated and displayed.

Ovul. Date
„„
Enter the expected ovulation date. LMP, GA, and EDD will be automatically calculated and displayed.

Ovul. Calculating LMP and EDD (LMP) with Ovul. Date

Tips!
The following formulae are used:
XX
LMP = Ovul. Date - 14
XX
EDD = (280 -14) + Ovul. Date

NOTE: Values that have been calculated and entered cannot be changed.

3-11
 Operation Manual

Number of Fetuses
„„
Enter the number of fetuses. Up to four may be entered.

Day of Cycle
„„
Enter a menstrual period in number of days (dd).

Para
„„
Enter the number of deliveries.

Gravida
„„
Enter the number of pregnancies.

Aborta
„„
Enter the number of miscarriages.

Ectopic
„„
Enter the number of ectopic pregnancies.

New Pregnancy
„„
Deletes the patient's existing OB information.

[Figure 3.6 Study Information-OB]

3-12
 Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis

Gynecology
Enter the gynecological information.

NOTE:
XX
In the GYN information input screen, even if the Ovul. Date is entered, LMP and EDD will not be
calculated automatically.
XX
For other gynecological information, refer to the OB section.

[Figure 3.7 Study Information-Gynecology]

Adult Echo
In Category, select Adult Echo. Enter additional information for Cardiac.

■■ BP
Enter maximum/minimum blood pressures.

[Figure 3.8 Study Information – Adult Echo]

3-13
 Operation Manual

Pediatric Echo
In Category, select Pediatric Echo. Enter additional information for Pediatric Cardiac.

[Figure 3.9 Study Information – Pediatric Echo]

Fetal Heart
In Category, select Fetal Heart. Enter additional information for Fetal Cardiac. For information on each of
the items, refer to the OB section.

[Figure 3.10 Study Information – Fetal Heart]

3-14
 Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis

Vascular
In Category, select Vascular. Enter additional information for vascular.

[Figure 3.11 Study Information – Vascular]

TCD
In Category, select TCD. Enter additional information for TCD.

[Figure 3.12 Study Information – TCD]

3-15
 Operation Manual

Finding Patient Information

In the Patient Information screen, select the Search tab. You can search the patient information with following
two methods.

Local Search
Search through the information stored in the system.

[Figure 3.13 Search - Local]

Perform the following steps:

1. Under Search Source, select Local.
2. Under Search By, select the desired search criteria.
▶ Select Patient ID to search by patient ID, or select Patient Name to search by patient name.
3. After enter the required ID or name in the search box, click Search. The list of patients who match the
search criteria will be displayed.

XX
To display a list of all the patients that are available in the system, click Search All.
Tips!
XX
Clicking items such as ID or Name sorts entries in alphabetical or numerical order for the
selected criteria.

4. To apply information on the selected patient to the system, click Apply after selecting a patient from
the patient list.
▶ To delete the ID and all other information of the selected patient, click Delete.
▶ To select all patients in the list, click Select All.

3-16
 Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis

WARNING: If a patient ID is deleted, all related data and images stored in SONOVIEW are erased.

Worklist Search
Perform a search by connecting to the DICOM Modality Worklist server in the hospital network.

NOTE: Worklist search is available only when DICOM is enabled. The Worklist Server can be
specified at Setup > DICOM. For more information, please refer to “Setting DICOM” in Chapter 7
‘Utilities’.

Perform the following steps:

1. Under Search Source, select Worklist.
2. After entering at least one item out of Patient ID, Last Name, Accession # (worklist number) and
Procedure ID, click Search. The list of patients who match the criteria will be displayed.

Clicking items such as Date/Time or Patient Name sorts entries in alphabetical or numerical order
Tips!
for the selected criteria.

3. To apply information on the selected patient to the system, click Apply after selecting a patient from
the patient list.

[Figure 3.14 Search - Worklist]

3-17
 Operation Manual

Managing Patient Exams

In the Patient Information screen, select the Exam View tab. The list of exams for the patient ID applied in the
previous search will appear.

NOTE: The exam list appears only when a patient searches is completed and the related patient
information is applied to the system.

The list provides following information as well as Patient ID, Name, Age, and Gender;
▶ Exam Date
▶ Images: the number of saved images
▶ Measure: measurement status
▶ SR: i.e., Structured Report. Whether a report has been prepared
▶ SE: i.e., Stress Echo. Whether the SE test has been conducted
▶ SC: i.e., Storage Commit. Exam transfer status
▶ Q: Strain data availability (Quantification)
▶ Lock status

Clicking items such as Patient ID or Name sorts entries in alphabetical or numerical order for the
Tips!
selected criteria.

[Figure 3.15 Exam View]

3-18
 Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis

Executing Exam
Use the trackball and the Set button to select an exam, and then click Review Exam or Continue Exam
on the screen. For an exam currently being executed, the button is displayed as Current Exam and
disabled.

NOTE: If the selected exam has been executed in the past 24 hours, the button in the lower left
corner is displayed as Continue Exam. If the exam was executed earlier than this, the button is
displayed as Review Exam.

■■ Continue Exam
In addition to using the Resume Exam function, you can update the current scan with the exam
executed previously.
The selected exam appears on the screen and scanning is available. The initial execution date for the
corresponding exam (Exam Resumed) is displayed in the feedback area.
Double-clicking a stored image in the thumbnail area at the bottom of the screen retrieves the
image and displays the stored image information. In the retrieved exam screen, you can perform
measurements or enter text, bodymarkers or indicators.

■■ Review Exam
The selected exam appears on the screen. Double-clicking a stored image in the thumbnail area at the
bottom of the screen retrieves the image and displays the initial execution date for the corresponding
exam (Exam Reviewed) and the stored image information. In the retrieved exam screen, you can
perform measurements or enter text, bodymarkers or indicators.

Viewing Exam
Select an exam by using the trackball and the Set button, and click Review on the screen. Switch to the
SONOVEIW screen.

NOTE: For information on using SONOVIEW, please refer to Chapter 6 “Image Management.”

3-19
 Operation Manual

Deleting Exam
Select an exam by using the trackball and the Set button, and click Delete on the screen. All images for
the exam will be deleted. However, an exam in progress or a locked exam cannot be deleted.

NOTE: Once deleted, exams cannot be restored.

To select more than one image, press the Set button while holding down the Ctrl key on the
Tips!
keyboard.

Sending Exams via DICOM

You can send the selected exams via the DICOM network.

NOTE: Before using this feature, make sure that DICOM is properly configured. For information on
configuring DICOM, please refer to “Setting DICOM” in Chapter 7 ‘Utilities’.

Perform the following steps to send the selected exam via DICOM:
1. Select an exam(s) and then click Send on the screen. The DICOM Storage window will appear.

To select more than one image, press the Set button while holding down the Ctrl key on the
Tips!
keyboard.

2. Select an image or report to send. You can select images under Storage Image, and reports under
Storage SR.
3. Clicking Transfer starts a transfer and displays the transfer progress (%). To cancel the transfer, click
Close.
▶ To check the DICOM connection with the server before sending the exam, click Test.

3-20
 Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis

[Figure 3.16 DICOM Storage]

3-21
 Operation Manual

Printing Exams via DICOM

NOTE: Before using this feature, make sure that DICOM is properly configured. For information on
configuring DICOM, please refer to “Setting DICOM” in Chapter 7 ‘Utilities’.

Perform the following steps to print the selected exam via DICOM:
1. After selecting an exam, click Print on the screen. The DICOM Printer window will be displayed.

To select more than one image, press the Set button while holding down the Ctrl key on the
Tips!
keyboard.

2. Click Transfer. The transfer will be started and its progress (%) will be displayed. To cancel, click Close.
▶ To check the DICOM connection with the server before sending the exam, click Test.

[Figure 3.17 DICOM Printer]

3-22
 Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis

Exporting Exam
Perform the following steps to export the selected exam to an external storage device:
1. After selecting an exam, click Export on the screen. The Image Export window will be displayed.

To select more than one image, press the Set button while holding down the Ctrl key on the
Tips!
keyboard.

2. Under Drive, select the target storage device.

3. In File Name, specify the filename. By default, the same filename is assigned to all images in the exam,
with a serial number appended to each filename.
4. In File Format, specify the format in which files will be saved. Select from BMP, JPEG, TIFF or DICOM.
5. In Export Option, specify the export option(s) as below:
▶ 2D cine: The saved Cine images are converted to an AVI file and then exported.
▶ Hide Patient information: Images are exported without patient ID and name.

6. Under Directory, select a target location. To create a new directory, click and then specify the
directory name. To delete the existing directory, click Files lists the existing files in the storage
device.
7. Click Export to start exporting. To cancel, click Close.

[Figure 3.18 Image Export]

3-23
 Operation Manual

Backing up Exam
You can back up the selected exams in an external storage device.

NOTE: Before using this feature, make sure that DICOM is properly configured. For information on
configuring DICOM, please refer to “Setting DICOM” in Chapter 7 ‘Utilities’.

1. Connect a storage media for backup. MO, CD-ROM or Flash Memory can be used.
2. Select an exam(s) and then click Backup on the screen.

To select more than one image, press the Set button while holding down the Ctrl key on the
Tips!
keyboard.

3. A confirmation window will appear asking whether to continue the backup. Click Yes to continue.
Click No to cancel.
4. The Select Drive window will appear. Under Drive, select the media where the selected exams will be
saved.
5. Click Ok to start the backup. Click Cancel to cancel.

[Figure 3.19 Exam Backup]

3-24
 Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis

Reviewing Measurements
In the Patient Information screen, press the Measure Data tab. You can view the measurements entered or
save them in an Excel file. The * symbol next to Exam Date indicates that the data is the current measurement
data.

■■ Package
Select a measurement package to display on the screen. Enter the measurement date.

■■ Refresh
Update the measurement data. New measurements, or the measurements entered, are added.

■■ Save
The Save To Excel window appears, allowing you to save information on the screen in an Excel file. By
default, the Excel file name is set to the measurement ID.
After specifying the target path and file name, click Save to save the information. To cancel saving, click
Close.

NOTE: Checking the HTML checkbox saves information in an HTML file instead of an Excel file.

[Figure 3.20 Measure Data - View]

3-25
Chapter 4
Diagnosis Modes

‹‹Information.......................................................4-3
Diagnosis Mode Type..............................................................4-3
Basic Use......................................................................................4-4

‹‹Basic Mode.........................................................4-7
2D Mode......................................................................................4-7
M Mode......................................................................................4-12
Color Doppler Mode.............................................................4-15
Power Doppler Mode............................................................4-19
PW Spectral Doppler Mode................................................4-22
CW Spectral Doppler Mode................................................4-27
TDI Mode...................................................................................4-29
TDW Mode................................................................................4-30

‹‹Combined Mode............................................. 4-31

2D/C/PW Mode.......................................................................4-31
2D/PD/PW Mode....................................................................4-31
2D/C/CW Mode.......................................................................4-31
2D/PD/CW Mode....................................................................4-31
2D/C/M Mode..........................................................................4-32
2D/C Live Mode.......................................................................4-32
2D/TDI/TDW.............................................................................4-32

‹‹Multi-Image Mode......................................... 4-33

Dual Mode.................................................................................4-33
Quad Mode...............................................................................4-35
 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes

Information

Diagnosis Mode Type

This product supports a variety of diagnosis modes including Basic Mode, Combined Mode, and Multi-Image
Mode.

Basic Mode: Consists of different modes, each of which has a specific usage and function. By default, 2D
„„
Mode is applied together with other mode.

Combined Mode: For an image, two or three Basic Modes are applied at the same time. By default, 2D
„„
Mode is applied together with other mode. An image is viewed in a single screen.

Multi-Image Mode: The screen is divided into two (dual) or four (quad) sub screens, each of which is used
„„
to view an image. Since each sub screen can display a different image, it can be a very useful feature,
allowing multilateral views of an organ.
The types of diagnosis mode that are available with the product are shown below:

Mode Type

2D Mode
Color Doppler Mode
Power Doppler Mode
M Mode
Basic Mode
PW Spectral Doppler Mode
CW Spectral Doppler Mode
Tissue Doppler Imaging Mode
Tissue Doppler Wave Mode

2D/C/PW Mode
2D/PD/PW Mode
2D/C/CW Mode
Combined Mode 2D/PD/CW Mode
2D/C/M Mode
2D/C Live Mode
2D/TDI/TDW Mode

Dual Mode
Multi-Image Mode
Quad Mode

NOTE: Diagnosis modes and the soft menu may be limited depending on the type of probe
selected.

4-3
 Operation Manual

Basic Use
The items that can be used commonly in each diagnosis mode are shown below:

Using Control Panel

The items that can be used in each diagnosis mode are provided as menu items. You can change the
image format or optimize an image to facilitate your diagnosis.

„„ Gain
Use the dial-button on the control panel. The Gain button appears differently depending on the
diagnosis mode, and it is usually in the form of a dial-button used to select a diagnosis mode.
You can adjust the brightness of an image. If you rotate the Gain dial-button clockwise, its value
increases.

„„ TGC (Time Gain Compensation)

Use the TGC slide on the control panel.
In general, ultrasound penetration gets weaker with depth. TGC can be used to compensate for this
effect.
The product provides eight TGC slides for varying depths, allowing you to adjust Gain by area. Among
the eight slides, the top slide represents the shallowest area, while the lower slides represent the deeper
ones.
Move the slide to the right (+) to increase Gain, brightening the image.

„„ Focus
Use Focus dial-button on the control panel to adjust the location of focus.

„„ Depth
Use Depth dial-button on the control panel to adjust the image scanning depth.
The allowable range for adjustment varies with the selected probe.

NOTE: The same dial-button is used for Focus and Depth. Press the button to choose which
function.

4-4
 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes

„„ Zoom

Use the Zoom dial-button on the control panel.

You can magnify an image. An image can be magnified by either Read Zoom or Write Zoom.

- Read Zoom
This function allows you to zoom an image saved in a hard disk.
1. Rotate the Zoom dial-button on the control panel .
2. Use the trackball to move the Zoom box. You can locate the Zoom box in an image with the Zoom
Navigation box on the left side of the screen.
3. View the magnified image.

- Write Zoom
This function allows you to magnify and scan an image in real time.
1. Use the Zoom dial-button on the control panel. The Write Zoom box will appear on the screen.
2. Magnify an image and scan it. Use the Set button to move and resize the Zoom box. Each time you
press the Set button, the current zoom box status will be displayed at the bottom of the screen.
- P reZoom position: You can move the Zoom box. Use the trackball to move the Zoom box.
- PreZoom size: You can resize the Zoom box. Use the trackball to resize the Zoom box .
3. If you press the Zoom button in the PreZoom position status, the status is changed to Write
Zoom status. If you press the Zoom button in the Pre Zoom size status, the status is moved to the
PreZoom position status.

Press the Zoom dial-button again to exit Zoom Mode. Or Press the Exit button on the control panel. In
Write Zoom Mode, changing the depth also exits Zoom Mode automatically.

4-5
 Operation Manual

„„ QuickScan

NOTE: The QuickScan function is available with specific probes and applications only.

Use the Q Scan button on the control panel. The "Q Scan’’ mark will appear at the top of an image.
In 2D Mode, it is used to optimize the contrast and brightness of an image by adjusting Gain and TGC
automatically. In PW Spectral Doppler Mode, it is used to optimize the spectrum by adjusting Scale and
Baseline automatically.
Press the Q Scan button again to exit QuickScan Mode. Or Press the Exit button on the control panel.

Using Soft Menu

The items that are commonly used in each diagnosis mode during scanning are provided as softmenu
items. You can use the softmenu dial-button corresponding to a specific menu item on the control panel.
If you rotate the dial-button, the setting for the selected item changes.
Change pages by pressing the Space Bar on the keyboard if the soft menu is more than two pages long.

4-6
 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes

Basic Mode

2D Mode
This basic mode, also referred to as B Mode (Brightness mode), provides scan planes of organs. This is used to
display two-dimensional anatomy images in the direction of scanning in real time.

[Figure 4.1 2D Mode]

Entering 2D Mode

NOTE: Because 2D Mode is applied by default for all diagnosis modes, it cannot be terminated.

Press the 2D dial-button on the control panel.

If you press the 2D dial-button in other diagnosis modes, it will switch to the basic 2D Mode.

4-7
 Operation Manual

2D Mode Menu

[Figure 4.2 2D Mode - Softmenu]

„„ 2D Mode
Set the 2D mode to use. Rotate the [1] dial-button on the softmenu to select a value from following:
▶ Fun (Fundamental): Normal 2D mode.

▶ Har (Harmonic): Optimizes images using ultrasound waves. ‘HAR’ is displayed in the image
information.
▶ PI (Pulse Inversion): Displays images more clearly by inverting the pulse. ‘INV’ is displayed in the
image information.

„„ Frequency
Set the frequency of the probe. The selected frequency is displayed in the title area. Rotate the [1] dial-
button on the softmenu to select a value from following:
▶ Res (Resolution) : High frequency

▶ Gen (General) : General frequency

▶ Pen (Penetration) : Low frequency

Spatial Compound (Optional)

„„

NOTE: This item only appears in the soft menu when a Linear Probe is used.

Select Off, Low, Medium, or High by rotating the [2] dial button. The mark is displayed on the right
side of the image area when using the Spatial Compound function.

4-8
 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes

„„ Dynamic Range
Adjust contrast by changing the ratio of minimum/maximum input signal values. Rotate the [2] dial-
button on the softmenu to select a value between 50 - 200. Increasing Dynamic Range smoothes an
image.

„„ SRF Index
It is used to optimize an image by minimizing noise and adjusting the brightness of boundaries
automatically. Select from 0 through 3 by rotating the [3] dial button. SRF stands for Speckle Reduction
Filter. Three pre-configured indices are provided.

„„ DMR+ Index (Optional)

It is used to obtain a clearer image by eliminating noise and enhancing boundaries. Select a size
between 0 and 5 by rotating the [3] dial button. DMR+ stands for DynamicMR+.

NOTE:
XXConnect a dongle to the console before using DynamicMR+. (Dongles can be purchased separately
from the product)
For information on installing a dongle, please refer to the DynamicMR+ User Manual.
XX

Cine Type
„„
This setting is used to specify how cine images are to be stored when the control panel’s Acquire
button is pressed. Select Beat, Time, or Manual by rotating the [4] dial button.

Beat: The images are saved for the set beat. ECG Beat can be set by rotating the [4] dial button.
XX

Time: The images are saved for the set time. Time (secs) can be set by rotating the [4] dial button.
XX

Manual: The images are saved from the time when the Acquire button is pressed first until the
XX
button is pressed again.

„„ Focus
Select the number of focusing points. Select a value from 1 through 4 by rotating the soft menu’s [4]
dial button.

2D/C Live
„„
The 2D image and Color Doppler image for the scanned area can be displayed simultaneously in
real time. Set the [5] dial button to On or Off.

4-9
 Operation Manual

Density
„„
Set the scan line density. Select Min, Low, Medium, or High by rotating the [5] dial button.
The number of scan lines increases as you go from Min  Low  Medium  High, resulting in
higher image resolution. However, the frame rate is reduced.

M Line
„„

NOTE: The M line always appears in the following applications. Cardiac, TCD, Contrast.

An M line appears on the image. Turn the dial-button [6] to “on” or “off”. The M line indicates where
the observed image is located in the 2D image when M or PW mode is used together with 2D mode.

„„ Sector Width
Set the image width. Rotate the [6] dial-button on the softmenu to select a value between
40 - 100%. Increasing the image width reduces the frame rate.

Indicator
„„
Pressing the [1] dial button activates the indicator mode. For detailed information, refer to ‘Chapter
6. Image Management’.

„„ Gray Map
Set the 2D Post Curve. Rotate the [1] dial-button on the softmenu to select a value between
1 – 13.

„„ L/R Flip
Flip the left and right sides of an image. The M mark above an image indicates the current direction of
the image. Rotate the [2] dial-button on the softmenu to select a value from Left or Right.

„„ Chroma
Set the color of 2D image. Rotate the [2] dial-button on the softmenu to select a value between 0 – 12.

„„ U/D Flip

NOTE: This item appears in the softmenu only when a Convex Probe or a Phased Array Probe is
used.

4-10
 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes

Flip the up and down sides of an image. Rotate the [3] dial-button on the softmenu to select a value
from Up or Down.

„„ Reject Level
Eliminate noise or low level echoes for a clear view of images. Rotate the [3] dial-button on the
softmenu to select a value between 1 - 32.

Trapezoidal
„„

NOTE: The Trapezoidal item only appears in the soft menu when a Linear Probe is used.

In general, the rectangular frame provided by a Linear Probe is changed to a trapezoidal shape. This
allows a wider view of an image. Turn the dial-button [3] to “on” or “off”.
The Trapezoid function may not be available for certain depths. In addition, the Write Zoom function
cannot be accessed with the Zoom dial when the Trapezoidal function is in use. (However, Read
Zoom can still be used.)

„„ FSI
This function synthesizes an image in 2D mode with data obtained from frequencies that have various
characteristics. Therefore, resolution is improved where the depth of display is shallow and penetration
is improved where the depth of display is deep. Turn the dial-button [4] and select a value from 1
through 3. FSI stands for Full Spectrum Imaging.

„„ Frame Avg
When an image is updated, the current and previous images are averaged. Rotate the [5] dial-button
on the softmenu to select a value between 0 - 15. Speckles may appear when the same diagnosis area
is scanned continuously. This function is used to minimize such speckles.

Document
„„
Pressing the [5] dial button activates the text mode. For detailed information, refer to ‘Chapter 6.
Image Management’.

„„ Power
Power is the intensity of the acoustic output. Rotate the [6] dial-button on the softmenu to select a
value between 10 -100.

4-11
 Operation Manual

M Mode
The M Mode is used to specify an observation area in a 2D image with the M Line, and display changes over
time.
This mode is appropriate for the observation of organs with a lot of movement such as cardiac valves. The 2D
Mode image is also shown, allowing the marking and adjustment of an observation area within the entire
image.

[Figure 4.3 M Mode]

Entering & Exiting M Mode

Press the M dial-button on the control panel. Press it again to return to 2D mode.

M Mode Screen
„„ M Line
Use the trackball on the control panel to move to the right or left. The M Line indicates the relative
position of the M Mode image in the 2D image. Therefore, you can move the M Line to change the
observation area.

4-12
 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes

M Mode Menu

[Figure 4.4 M Mode – Softmenu]

„„ Display Format
Specify how the M and 2D images are placed in the screen. Rotate the dial-button [3] to select a value
from Top/Bottom or Side by Side.
▶ Top / Bottom: places the 2D image and M image at the top and the bottom.

▶ Side By Side1~3: The 2D image is displayed at the left and the M image at the right. The greater
the number, the greater the M image becomes.

„„ Speed
Set the progression speed of M images. Rotate the dial-button [5] on the softmenu to select from 60Hz,
120Hz, 180Hz, 240Hz, 300Hz and 360Hz.

„„ Anatomical M
Turn the dial-button [6] to “on” or “off”.

NOTE: The “Anatomical M” item appears on the soft menu only when the phased array probe is
used.

Anatomical M is the function that sets the M line freely and observes the image. Use the Set button on
the control panel to specify the length, position and angle of the M Line.

4-13
 Operation Manual

Setting AMM
Tips!
1. Press dial-button [6] Anatomical M in the soft menu. The ‘M Point1’ mark will appear in the user
information area, indicating that the start point for M line can be set.
2. Use the trackball to specify the start point of the M Line (M Point 1) for the 2D image.
3. P ress the Set button to save the start point. ‘M Point2’ will appear in the user information area.
4. U
 se the trackball to specify the end point of the M Line (M Point 2) for the 2D image.
5. To finish setting, press dial-button [6] again to turn the Anatomical M function off. If you switch to
the Combined Mode or the Multi-image Mode, the Anatomical M function will be automatically
turned off.

NOTE: For information on other softmenu items, please refer to “2D Mode.”

4-14
 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes

Color Doppler Mode

This mode displays the colored blood flow pattern of the ROI (Region of Interest) within the 2D image.
It is appropriate for examining the presence of the blood flow, its average speed and direction. The 2D Mode
image is also shown allowing the marking and adjustment of the ROI within the entire image.

[Figure 4.5 Color Doppler Mode]

Entering & Exiting C Mode

Press the Color dial-button on the control panel. Press it again to return to 2D mode.

C Mode Screen
„„ ROI Box
ROI stands for Region of Interest. The ROI Box outlines the area of the 2D image where color (blood
flow) information is displayed in Color Doppler Mode.
Use the Set button to move and resize the ROI box. Each time you the Set button, the current state of
the ROI box is displayed in the lower left of the screen.

4-15
 Operation Manual

▶ ROI Position: You can move the ROI box. Use the trackball to move the ROI box and specify its
position.
▶ ROI Size: You can resize the ROI box. Use the trackball to resize the ROI box and specify its size

„„ Color Bar
In Color Doppler Mode, the color bar indicates the direction and speed of blood flow. Relative to the
baseline in the centre, the red color indicates the direction and speed of the blood flow towards a
probe. By contrast, the blue color indicates the direction and speed of the blood flow away from a
probe.
▶ Adjusting the color bar baseline : Use the Baseline dial-button on the control panel. If you rotate
the Baseline dial-button clockwise, the baseline on the color bar rises.

„„ Scale (PRF)
Use the Scale dial-button on the control panel. Rotating the Scale dial clockwise makes the PRF (Pulse
Repetition Frequency) increase so that the speed range of the blood flow is widened, and vice versa.

C Mode Menu

[Figure 4.6 Color Doppler Mode - Softmenu]

„„ Sensitivity
Set the sensitivity of color image. Increasing sensitivity enhances the sensitivity of a color image, but reduces
the frame rate. Rotate the dial-button [2] on the softmenu to select a value between 8 – 31.

4-16
 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes

„„ Steer

NOTE: This item appears in the softmenu only when a Linear Probe is used.

Rotate the dial-button to adjust the angle of the ultrasound beam. This can minimize loss of color
information based on the angle of the ultrasound beam. Rotate the [5] dial-button on the softmenu to
select a value from Left, None or Right.

„„ Filter
Filter is an electrical filter used to eliminate low-frequency Doppler signals caused by the motion of
vessel walls. Adjust Cutoff Frequency to remove from the screen the Doppler signals for which the
frequencies are lower than the Cutoff Frequency.
Rotate the [6] dial-button on the softmenu to select a value between 0 – 3.

„„ Color Map
Set the post curve of C mode image. Rotate the [1] dial-button on the softmenu to select a value
between Type 1 – 14.

„„ Color Invert
Invert the color bar. Inverting the color bar also inverts the colors displayed on the image.
Press the [1] dial-button on the softmenu to select On/Off.

„„ Color Format
Set the C mode to use. Turn the soft menu dial-button [3] and select one of Color + B/W, or B/W Only.

„„ Color Mode
Sets details of the color display. Rotate the [3] dial-button on the softmenu to select a value from
Velocity and Vel + Var (Variance). Numbers will be displayed above and below the color bar indicating
the color scale values.

NOTE: Available only when the cardiac application item is selected.

4-17
 Operation Manual

„„ Balance

Adjust the range of color image display by comparing the Gray Level of the 2D image with the Doppler
signal values of the color image. As the Balance value increases, the color image appears, even in
regions with a high Gray Level in 2D image (bright regions), expanding the range of the color image.
Rotate the [2] dial-button on the softmenu to select a value between 1 - 16.

NOTE: For information on other softmenu items, please refer to “2D Mode.”

4-18
 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes

Power Doppler Mode

This mode displays the color intensity of blood flow within the ROI in the 2D image.
It is appropriate for examining the presence and amount of blood flow. The 2D Mode image is also shown,
allowing the marking and adjustment of the ROI within the entire image.

[Figure 4.7 Power Doppler Mode]

Entering & Exiting PD Mode

Press the PD dial-button on the control panel. Press it again to return to 2D mode.

PD Mode Screen
„„ Color Bar
In Power Doppler Mode, the color bar varies depending on the screen display for Power Doppler Mode
that is selected in the PD Mode menu.
▶ PD Mode: The color bar indicates the presence of blood flow and its amount. The top of the color
bar is the brightest section, where the amount of blood flow is at its highest.

4-19
 Operation Manual

▶ DPDI Mode: The color bar indicates the direction and speed of blood flow. With the baseline in the
centre, the red color represents the direction and speed of blood flow moving toward the probe,
and the blue color represents the direction and speed of blood flow away from the probe.

„„ ROI Box
The ROI (Region of Interest) outlines the area of the 2D image where color (blood flow) information is
displayed in Power Doppler Mode.

PD Mode Menu

[Figure 4.8 Power Doppler Mode - Softmenu]

„„ Color Invert
Invert the color bar. Inverting the color bar also inverts the colors displayed on the image.
Press the [1] dial-button on the softmenu to select On/Off.

NOTE: The Invert Color function appears on the soft menu only when the PD mode is selected as
the DPDI mode.

4-20
 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes

„„ PD Mode
Select the screen display for Power Doppler Mode. Rotate the [3] dial-button on the softmenu to select
from PD Mode or DPDI Mode.
▶ PD Mode: Shows only the power of the blood flow.

▶ DPDI Mode: Directional Power Doppler Imaging (DPDI) shows the power, velocity and direction of
blood flow.

NOTE: For information on other softmenu items, please refer to “Color Doppler Mode.”

4-21
 Operation Manual

PW Spectral Doppler Mode

PW stands for Pulse Wave. PW Spectral Doppler Mode gives information on the speed of blood flow at
a specific site in the form of a spectral trace and audio signal. Distance (depth) information can also be
obtained by transmitting pulses over time frames.
This mode is useful for measuring low-speed blood flow such as in the abdomen and peripheral vessels. The
2D Mode image is also shown, allowing the marking and adjustment of an observation area within the entire
image.

[Figure 4.9 PW Spectral Doppler Mode]

NOTE: If ‘M Line’ is enabled, you can obtain a spectral Doppler image immediately in PW mode.

Entering & Exiting PW Spectral Doppler Mode

Press the PW dial-button on the control panel. Press it again to return to 2D Mode. Press the Update
button on the control panel to obtain a spectral doppler image.

4-22
 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes

PW Spectral Doppler Mode Screen

„„ Sample Volume
When Sample Volume is on the blood flow of the 2D image, it represents Doppler Spectrum. The size
and depth of Sample volume is displayed in [mm] units. Its position is moved with the trackball and
displayed in the xx.xx@yy.yy mm format. The format means that a Sample Volume of ‘xx.xx’ mm size is
located at a depth of ‘yy.yy’ mm.
For example, 2.00@16.70 mm means that a Sample Volume of 2.00mm size is located at a depth of
16.07mm.
▶ Moving Sample Volume: Use the trackball on the control panel.

▶ Resizing Sample Volume: Adjust the Sample Volume size by pressing the Set button and using the
trackball on the control panel. Press the Set button again to return to the Sample Volume Position
Control screen. Each time the Set button is pressed, the trackball at the bottom of the screen
selects SV Pos or SV Size.
▶ Adjusting the angle of Sample Volume: Use the Angle dial-button on the control panel. If you
rotate the dial-button clockwise, the angle increases from between –70 ~ +70. Pressing the dial-
button changes the angle as –60, 0 +60. Adjusting the angle of Sample Volume allows more
accurate speed measurement.

„„ Adjusting Doppler Baseline

Use the Baseline dial-button on the control panel. If you rotate the dial-button clockwise, the baseline
goes up.

„„ HPRF (High PRF) Function

This function measures blood flow for which the speed exceeds the specified limit at a specified depth.
It expands the scale into double the size of the original scale. This function is available only in PW
Spectral Doppler Mode (D Only).
▶ Activating HPRF

To activate HPRF, increase the Scale values at the required depth. A The Phantom Gate will appear
on the D Line at a position higher than the sample volume. Once HPRF starts, PRF does not
increase even if you increase the scale value.

▶ Finishing HPRF

While HPRF is in use, decrease the scale value by one step to finish HPRF. The maximum PRF values
in PW Spectral Doppler Mode are shown.

4-23
 Operation Manual

▶Moving Sample Volume

To move the Sample Volume position in the D Only state, the system calculates PRF values and the
Phantom Gate position, and updates them on the PW Spectral Doppler image. HPRF is terminated
when HPRF cannot be activated.
When Sample Volume is moved in the 2D Only state, the PRF values don’t change.

NOTE: HPRF is not activated in Simultaneous Mode. It is also not activated if [PRF*2] exceeds 23KHz.

CAUTION:
XXThe Phantom Gate position can be located outside the 2D image area in Zoom Mode.
XX
Make sure that sample volume and Phantom Gate are not placed together in the measuring area. If
more than two Sample Volumes are located in the vessels, all Doppler components will appear in the
spectrum, causing noise.

PW Spectral Doppler Mode Menu

[Figure 4.10 PW Spectral Doppler Mode - Softmenu]

„„ Simultaneous
View the 2D image and Spectral Doppler image simultaneously in real time. The Simultaneous function
decreases Doppler PRF, thus decreasing the measurable speed range.
Press the [3] dial-button on the softmenu to set On/Off.

NOTE: It appears in the PW menu only Setup > General > Simultaneous Mode is set to Allow.

4-24
 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes

„„ Volume
Adjusts the doppler volume. doppler Rotate the [6] dial-button on the softmenu to select a value
between 0 - 100.

„„ SV Size
Set the sample volume size. Rotate the [2] dial-button on the softmenu to select a value between 0.5 –
15.

„„ Auto Calc
Doppler Trace is performed and the resulting values are displayed. Press the [5] dial-button on the
softmenu to set On/Off. When it is on, [6] Mean Trace is activated on the softmenu.
The displayed values are as below. For information on setting display values, please refer to Chapter 7,
“Utilities.”
▶ Peak Systolic Velocity (PSV) ▶ Time Averaged Mean Velocity (TAM)
▶ End Diastolic Velocity (EDV) ▶ Diastole / Systole Ratio (D/S)
▶ Time Averaged Peak Velocity (TAP) ▶ Max Pressure Gradient (PGmax)
▶ Resistive Index (RI) ▶ Mean Pressure Gradient (PGmean)
▶ Pulsatility Index (PI) ▶ Velocity Time Integral (VTI)
▶ Systole / Diastole Ratio (S/D) ▶ PeakA

CAUTION: The measurements done by Auto Trace under Measure and Real Time Automatic
Doppler Trace (Automatic Calculator) may be different from each other. This is because the
algorithms for these two methods are different. It is recommended to use Auto Trace under
Measurement for more accurate measurement.

4-25
 Operation Manual

Things to Consider for Real Time Automatic Doppler Trace

Tips!
1. Aliasing occurs because PRF is too low in comparison to the image speed, or the spectrum is
clustered around the baseline because PRF is too high.
2. Peak is indistinctive or intermittent such as in Spectral waveforms for veins.
3. M
 eaningful spectrum distinction becomes difficult because Doppler Gain is set too high or too
low.
4. A
 n index is displayed during the transition time after Sample Volume is moved with the trackball.
5. The major spectral signals are cut off because Doppler Wall Filter is set too high.
6. P eak Trace is interrupted due to abnormal Doppler noise or artifact, and the heart rate is above
approximately 140 bpm.

The trace and/or results of Real Time Automatic Doppler Trace may not be accurate in the above
situations. Furthermore, during auto calculation, results will not be displayed if the Freeze function is
run against inaccurate values.

„„ AutoCalc Direction
Set the part of spectrum to use AutoCalc. Rotate the [5] dial-button on the softmenu to select a value
from Up, Down, or All.

„„ Mean Trace

NOTE: This item appears in the softmenu only when AutoCalc is on.

Doppler Trace is performed and the average values are displayed. Press the [6] dial-button on the
softmenu to set On/Off.

NOTE: For information on other softmenu items, please refer to “2D Mode” and “Color Doppler
Mode.”

4-26
 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes

CW Spectral Doppler Mode

CW stands for Continuous Wave. CW Spectral Doppler Mode gives information on the speed/direction of
blood flow at a specific site in the form of a spectral trace and audio signal. Unlike PW Spectral Doppler Mode,
it does not provide Sample Volume.

[Figure 4.11 CW Spectral Doppler Mode]

„„ Steered CW Spectral Doppler Mode

This mode is available with a Phase Array Probe only.
The 2D Mode image is also shown, allowing the marking and adjustment of an observation area within
the entire image.

„„ Static CW Spectral Doppler Mode

This mode is available with a Static CW Probe only. The 2D image is not displayed.

4-27
 Operation Manual

Entering & Exiting CW Spectral Doppler Mode

Press the CW dial-button on the control panel. Press it again to return to 2D Mode.

NOTE: For information on other softmenu items, please refer to “PW Spectral Doppler Mode.”

4-28
 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes

TDI Mode

NOTE: This function can be used only with Phased Array Probe and cardiac application.

TDI stands for Tissue Doppler Imaging. TDI mode represents movements of tissues such as a heart. TDI Mode
is available in Color Doppler or Power Doppler Mode. In Color Doppler or Power Doppler Mode, TDI shows
cardiac tissues in color.

[Figure 4.12 TDI mode]

Entering & Exiting TDI Mode

Press the TDI dial-button on the control panel. Press it again to return to 2D Mode.

NOTE: For information on other softmenu items, please refer to “Color Doppler Mode.”

4-29
 Operation Manual

TDW Mode

NOTE: This function can be used only with Phased Array Probe and cardiac application.

TDW stands for Tissue Doppler Wave. TDW mode represents movements of tissues such as a heart. TDW
Mode is available in PW or CW Spectral Doppler Mode. If it is used in Spectral Doppler Mode along with Color
Doppler or Power Doppler Mode, changes in cardiac tissues over time can be observed.

[Figure 4.13TDW Mode]

Entering TDW Mode

Press the PW dial-button on the control panel in TDI Mode.

NOTE: For information on other softmenu items, please refer to “PW Spectral Doppler Mode.”

4-30
 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes

Combined Mode
In Combined Mode, three different modes are combined including the default 2D Mode. Note that, in 2D/C
Live Mode, only two modes are combined: 2D and Color Doppler Modes.

2D/C/PW Mode
Color Doppler Mode and PW Spectral Doppler Mode are displayed simultaneously.
In Color Doppler Mode, press the PW dial-button on the control panel. Or, in PW Spectral Doppler Mode,
press the Color dial-button on the control panel.

2D/PD/PW Mode
Power Doppler Mode and PW Spectral Doppler Mode are displayed simultaneously.
In Power Doppler Mode, press the PW dial-button on the control panel. Or, in PW Spectral Doppler Mode,
press the PD dial-button on the control panel.

2D/C/CW Mode
Color Doppler Mode and CW Spectral Doppler Mode are displayed simultaneously. This mode is available
only with certain probes.
In Color Doppler Mode, press the CW dial-button on the control panel. Or, in CW Spectral Doppler Mode,
press the Color dial-button on the control panel.

2D/PD/CW Mode
Power Doppler Mode and CW Spectral Doppler Mode are displayed simultaneously. This mode is available
only with certain probes.
In Power Doppler Mode, press the CW dial-button on the control panel. Or, in CW Spectral Doppler Mode,
press the PD dial-button on the control panel.

4-31
 Operation Manual

2D/C/M Mode
Color Doppler Mode and M Mode are displayed simultaneously.
In Color Doppler Mode, press the M dial-button on the control panel. Or, in M Mode, press the Color dial-
button on the control panel. (This button is enabled for specific diagnostic applications with specific probes
only.)

2D/C Live Mode

2D Mode and Color Doppler Mode are displayed simultaneously. In 2D Mode or C Mode, press the [5] 2D/C
Live dial-button on the softmenu.

2D/TDI/TDW

NOTE: This function can be used only with Phased Array Probe and cardiac application.

TDI Mode and TDW Mode are displayed simultaneously. Press the PW dial-button on the control panel in TDI
Mode.

Changing Combined Mode Format

„„ Changing the active image mode
Press the Update button on the control panel. The current active image mode - ‘D Only’ or ‘2D Only’ - is
displayed above the menu on the screen.
In Combined Mode, more than two image modes are used at the same time. The image mode currently
in use is called ‘Active Image Mode.’ For example, if Sample Volume is moved with the trackball in 2D/C/
PW Mode, PW Spectral Doppler Mode becomes the current active image mode.
Because the menu and button options vary depending on the active image mode, use the Update
button change the active image mode.
Note that the active image mode cannot be changed with the Update button when the Freeze
function is in effect.

NOTE: For information on optimizing an image in Combined Mode, please refer to “Basic Mode.”

4-32
 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes

Multi-Image Mode
The product supports Dual Mode and Quad Mode. Whenever the F6 key, Single/Dual/Quad, on the keyboard
is pressed, the mode changes sequentially to Dual → Quad → Single. Press the F7 key, Select Active Window,
on the keyboard, to change the activated image area. In Multi-Image Mode, an image can be displayed in
different combined modes. Button operations in an active area are the same as in Combined Mode.

Dual Mode
You can compare two different images at the same time. Press the F7 key, Select Active Window, on the
keyboard. Each time you press the Dual button, one of the two images is selected. The current active
image mode is displayed as a yellow line at the top. Button and menu items for the current image mode are
displayed.

 and  buttons
Tips!
You can use the dual mode with  and  buttons.

 button  button
Starting the dual mode (The active Starting the dual mode (The active
Not in dual mode
window is left). window is right)

If the active window is left, screen is
changed to single mode.
In dual mode
If the active window is right, system
changes the active window to left.
If the active window is left, system
changes the active window to right.
If the active window is right, screen
is changed to single mode.

4-33
 Operation Manual

[Figure 4.14 Dual mode]

4-34
 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes

Quad Mode
You can compare four different images at the same time. Press the F7, Select Active Window, on the keyboard
continuously to select an image. Or, use the ,  keys on the keyboard. Each time you press the Quad
button, one of the four images is selected. The current active image mode is displayed as a yellow line at the
top. Button and menu items for the current image mode are displayed.

[Figure 4.15 Quad mode]

NOTE: For information on optimizing an image in Multi-Image Mode, please refer to “Basic Mode.”

4-35
Chapter 5 Measurements and
Calculations

‹‹Measurement Accuracy...................................5-3
Causes of Measurement Errors............................................5-3
Optimization of Measurement Accuracy........................5-5
Measurement Accuracy Table..............................................5-7

‹‹Basic Measurements........................................5-8
Distance Measurement........................................................5-10
Circumference and Area Measurement.........................5-14
Volume Measurement..........................................................5-16

‹‹Calculations by Application......................... 5-19

Things to note..........................................................................5-19
Common Measurement Methods...................................5-23
Cardiac Calculations..............................................................5-28
Vascular Calculations............................................................5-36
Fetal Echo Calculations........................................................5-60
TCD Calculations.....................................................................5-63
OB Calculations.......................................................................5-66
Gynecology Calculations ....................................................5-73
Abdomen Calculations ........................................................5-75
Chapter 5
‹‹Report.............................................................. 5-78
Viewing Report........................................................................5-79
Editing Report..........................................................................5-80
Adding Comment..................................................................5-82
Printing Report........................................................................5-82
Transfer Report........................................................................5-83
Export Report...........................................................................5-84
Change Template ..................................................................5-85
Insert Image..............................................................................5-88
Store SR......................................................................................5-88
Stress Echo Report.................................................................5-89
Graph .........................................................................................5-90
Closing Report.........................................................................5-94
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Measurement Accuracy
Measurement values can vary, depending on the nature of the ultrasound, the body’s response to ultrasound,
the measurement tools, algorithms, product settings, probe type and user operation.
Before using this product, make sure to read and understand the following information regarding the causes
of measurement errors, and measurement optimization.

Causes of Measurement Errors

Image Resolution
The resolution of ultrasound images may be limited by the available space.
▶ Errors due to a signal range may be minimized by adjusting focus settings. Optimizing focus settings
increases the resolution of the measurement area.
▶ In general, lateral resolution is lower than axial resolution. Therefore, measurements should be
performed along the axis of the ultrasound beam to obtain accurate values.
▶ Gain has a direct impact on resolution. Gain can be adjusted by using the Gain button for each
mode.
▶ In general, increasing the frequency of ultrasound enhances resolution.

Pixel Size
▶ An ultrasound images in the product consist of pixels.
▶ Since a single pixel represents the basic unit of an image, a measurement error may result in the
displacement of approximately ±1 pixel when compared to the original image size.
▶ However, this error becomes significant only when a narrow area in an image is measured.

Ultrasound Velocity
▶ The velocity of ultrasound used during measurement is usually 1,540 m/s on average.
▶ The velocity of ultrasound may vary depending on the cell type.
▶ The possible range of error is between approximately 2-5% depending on the structure of cells (about
2% for typical cells and about 5% for fatty cells).

5-3
 Operation Manual

Doppler Signal Adjustment

▶ During velocity measurement, an error may occur depending on the cosine angle between the
blood flow and the ultrasound beam.
▶ For Doppler velocity measurements, the most accurate results can be ensured when the ultrasound
beam is aligned in parallel with the blood flow.
▶ If that is not possible, the angle between them should be adjusted by using the Angle option.

Aliasing
▶ PW Spectral Doppler Mode uses a signal sampling technique to calculate the frequency (or velocity)
spectrum.
▶ Adjust the baseline or the velocity scale to minimize aliasing. A lower frequency probe can also be
used to reduce aliasing.
▶ Aliasing is dramatically reduced in CW Spectral Doppler Mode.

Calculation Equation
▶ Some of the calculation equations used for clinical purposes originate from hypotheses and
approximation.
▶ All calculation equations are based on medical reports and articles.

Human Error
▶ Human error may occur due to inappropriate use or lack of experience.
▶ This can be minimized through compliance with and thorough understanding of the manuals.

5-4
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Optimization of Measurement Accuracy

2D Mode
▶ Resolution is in proportion to the frequency of the probe.

▶ Penetration is in inverse proportion to the frequency of the probe.

▶ The highest resolution can be obtained at the focus of the probe where the ultrasound beam is
narrowest.
▶ The most accurate measurements can be obtained at the focus depth. The accuracy decreases as the
distance from the focus increases, widening the beam width.
▶ Using the zoom function or minimizing the depth display makes distance or area measurements more
accurate.

M Mode
▶ The accuracy of time measurements can be increased when the sweep velocity and the display format
are set to high values.
▶ The accuracy of distance measurements can be increased when the display format is set to higher
values.

Doppler Mode
▶ It is recommended to use lower frequency ultrasound for measurement of faster blood flows.

▶ The size of the sample volume is limited by the axial direction of the ultrasound.

▶ Using lower frequency ultrasound increases penetration.

▶ The accuracy of time measurements can be increased when the sweep velocity is increased.

▶ The accuracy of velocity measurements can be increased when the vertical scale is set to smaller values.

▶ It is most important to use an optimal Doppler angle to enhance the accuracy of velocity measurements.

5-5
 Operation Manual

Color/Power Doppler Mode

▶ A protocol is not specified for images in Color Doppler Mode or Power Doppler Mode. Therefore, the
same limitations imposed when measurements are taken in B/W images apply to the accuracy of the
measurements taken in these modes.
▶ It is not recommended to use images in Color/Power Doppler Mode for measurement of accurate blood
flow velocity.
▶ The amount of blood flow is calculated based on the average velocity rather than the peak velocity.

▶ In all applications, the amount of blood flow is measured in PW/CW Spectral Doppler Mode.

Cursor Position
▶ All measurements are affected by input data.

▶ To ensure accurate positioning of the cursor:

Adjust the images on the screen so that they are displayed at maximum granularity.
Use the front edge or boundary point of a probe to make the start and end points of a measurement
object more distinct.
Make sure that the probe direction is always aligned during measurement.

5-6
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Measurement Accuracy Table

The following tables show the accuracy of the measurements available using the product. Ensure that the
results of measurement accuracy checks are kept within the ranges specified in the table. Except for certain
applications or probes, the following accuracy ranges should be maintained for measurement of a straight
distance.

NOTE: To ensure accurate measurements, an accuracy check should be performed at least once
per year. If the measurement accuracy exceeds the range recorded in the following table, contact
Samsung Medison service department.

2D Mode

System Tolerance: Test Accuracy

Measurements Range
(Whichever is greater) Methodology Based on

Axial Distance < ± 4% or 2mm Phantom Acquisition 0.01 – 25 cm

Lateral Distance < ± 4% or 2mm Phantom Acquisition 0.01 – 35 cm
Axial Resolution < ± 4% or 3mm Phantom Acquisition 0.01 – 25 cm
Lateral Resolution < ± 4% or 3mm Phantom Acquisition 0.01 – 35 cm

M Mode

System Tolerance Test Accuracy

Measurements Range
(whichever is greater) Methodology Based on

Depth < ± 5% or 3 mm Phantom Acquisition 1 ~ 25 cm

Time < ± 5% Signal generator Acquisition 0.01 - 11.3 sec

PW/CW Spectral Doppler Mode

Doppler System Tolerance

Accuracy based on Range
Measurement (whichever is greater)

PW:0.1cm/s - 8.8 m/s

Velocity < ± 15% Acquisition
CW:0.1cm/s - 19.3 m/s

Time < ± 5% Acquisition 10 ms - 9.44 s

5-7
 Operation Manual

Basic Measurements
Press the Caliper button on the control panel.

NOTE: Take basic measurements of distance and area regardless of the application. For information
on measurements for each application, please refer to “Measurements by Application” in this
chapter.

The available measurement methods vary depending on the current diagnosis mode. Please refer to the
following table:

Measurement Diagnosis Mode Measurement Method

Distance
Line Trace
2D, M, D
Angle
%StD
Distance Measurement M M Distance
D Velocity
D D A/B
D Trace

Ellipse
Circumference and Area
2D, M, D Trace
Measurement
%StA
3 Distance
1 Distance
Volume Measurement 2D, M, D Distance + Ellipse
Ellipse
MOD

[Table 5.1 Basic Measurements by Diagnosis Mode]

Basic Measurement Operations

The following is the information on common button operations for basic measurements:

[Figure 5.1 Basic measurement - Softmenu]

5-8
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

■■ Select/Change Measurement Method

Use the Softmenu dial-button on the control panel. The Softmenu items displayed vary depending on
the diagnosis mode. The selected measurement method is displayed in the user information area.

■■ Set Display Location of Measurement Results

Use the [4] Result Action dial-button on the softmenu.
▶ Move: Change the display location of measurement results. Use the trackball to change the
location and then press the Set button.
▶ Reset: Press the dial-button on the softmenu to initialize the display location of measurement
results.

NOTE: When measurement results are displayed in more than one screen because there are too
many of them, use Move to find the desired measurement results.

■■ Cancel Measurement Results

Press the [6] Undo dial-button on the softmenu to cancel the current measurement and take it again.

NOTE: Among volume measurement items, only 3 Distance and Distance+Ellipse can be undone.

■■ Delete Measurement Result

Press the Clear button on the control panel.

■■ Print Measurement Result

Press the Print button on the control panel.

■■ Finish Basic Measurements

Press the Caliper button again. Or press the Exit button.

NOTE: To change various settings such as measurement units, press the F1 key, Setup, or the F8
key, Utility, on the control panel and select Measure Setup > General. For more information,
please refer to Chapter 7 “Utilities.”

5-9
 Operation Manual

Distance Measurement
Distance
This is a basic measurement that is available in all diagnosis modes. You can specify two points in a 2D
image and measure the straight distance between them.
1. Select Distance in the softmenu [1]. “Distance” will appear in the user information area.
2. Use the trackball and the Set button on the control panel to specify both end points of the
measurement area.
▶ Use the trackball to place the cursor at the desired position and press the Set button.

Repositioning Point
Tips!
Pressing the Update button before pressing the Set button to complete positioning resets the
position of a point just set.

3. Specify both end points and then the distance between them will be measured.
4. Once measurement is done, the result is displayed on the screen.

Line Trace
It is a basic measurement that is available in all diagnosis modes. You can specify a point in a 2D image
and trace a curve from that point to measure the distance between them.
1. Select Line Trace in the softmenu [1]. “Line Trace” will appear in the user information area.
2. Use the trackball and the Set button on the control panel to specify the start point of the
measurement area.
▶ Use the trackball to place the cursor at the desired position and press the Set button.

3. Use the trackball to draw the desired curve and then press the Set button to set the end point.

Editing Curve
Tips!
Before pressing the Set button to specify the end point, you can rotate the [5] Delete dial-button
on the softmenu to delete a part of the curve being traced.

4. Specify both end points and then the length of the curve will be automatically measured.

5-10
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Angle
A basic measurement that is available in all diagnosis modes. Specify two straight lines in a 2D image and
measure the angle between them.
1. Select Angle in the softmenu [1]. “Angle” will appear in the user information area.
2. Draw two straight lines. For information on drawing a straight line, please refer to ‘Distance.’
3. The angle between two lines will be calculated and displayed on the screen.
▶ When two angles are calculated, the smaller angle is displayed.

%StD
StD stands for Stenosis Distance, which is a basic measurement available in all diagnosis modes. In a 2D
image, the diameter of a vessel is measured and the stenosis ratio calculated.
1. Select %StD in the softmenu [1]. “%StD” will appear in the user information area.
2. Measure the total diameter of a vessel using the Distance measurement method.
3. When a new cursor appears, measure the inner wall diameter of the vessel under stenosis.
4. Calculate %StD with the following equation:
%StD = (Outer Distance – Inner Distance) / Outer Distance × 100

M Distance
This is a basic measurement that is available in M Mode only. You can specify two points in an M image
and measure the distance, elapsed time and velocity between them.
1. Select M Distance in the softmenu [1]. “M Distance” will appear in the user information area.
2. Specify two points and then measure the shortest distance between them. The way that it is
measured is the same as in ‘Distance.’
3. Once measurement is done, the result is displayed on the screen.

D Velocity
This is a basic measurement that is available in Spectral Doppler Mode only. You can specify two points
in a Spectral Doppler image and measure the distance between them, and the velocity at each point to
calculate the velocity change, time change and acceleration.

NOTE: In a Spectral Doppler image, the X- and Y-axes represent time and velocity, respectively.

5-11
 Operation Manual

1. Select D Velocity in the softmenu [1]. “D Velocity” will appear in the user information area.
2. Specify two points and then measure the shortest distance between them. The way that it is
measured is the same as in ‘Distance.’
3. Once measurement is done, the result is displayed on the screen. The displayed measurement results
vary depending on the settings in Measure Setup > General > Caliper.
▶ V1: Velocity at Point 1 ▶ Time: Change in Time
▶ V2: Velocity at Point 2 ▶ Acc: Acceleration
▶ PGmax: Max Pressure Gradient ▶ RI: Resistivity Index
▶ V2-V1: Change in Velocity ▶ S/D: Systolic to Diastolic Ratio

The equations used for D Velocity measurement are as follows:

D A/B
This is a basic measurement that is available in Spectral Doppler Mode only. You can specify two points
in a Spectral Doppler image and measure the velocity at each point to calculate the ratio of the velocity
between them.
1. Select D A/B in the softmenu [1]. “D A/B” will appear in the user information area.
2. Specify two points for which to measure velocity.
▶ Use the trackball to place the cursor at the desired position and press the Set button.
3. Once measurement is done, the result is displayed on the screen. The displayed measurement results
vary depending on the settings in Measure Setup > General > Caliper.
▶V1: Velocity at Point 1 ▶PGmax: Max Pressure Gradient
▶V2: Velocity at Point 2 ▶V1/V2: The Ratio of Velocity

D Trace
This is a basic measurement that is available in Spectral Doppler Mode only. You can specify a point in
a Spectral Doppler image and trace a curve from that point to calculate the velocity, integral value and
average velocity of blood flow.

5-12
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

1. Select D Trace in the softmenu [1] . “D Trace” is displayed in the user information area.
2. Trace a curve. The method for measuring a curve is the same as in “Line Trace.”
3. When the measurement is finished, its result is shown on the screen. The displayed measurement
results vary depending on the settings in Measure Setup > General > Caliper.
▶PSV: Peak Systolic Velocity ▶PGmean: Mean Pressure Gradient
▶EDV: Edn Diastolic Velocity ▶VTI: Velocity Time Integral
▶PI: Pulsatility Index ▶PHT: Pressure Half Time
▶RI: Resistivity Index ▶Acc: Acceleration
▶S/D: Ratio of PSV to EDV ▶AccT: Acceleration Time
▶Vmax: Max Velocity ▶Dec: Deceleration
▶Vmean: Mean Velocity ▶DecT: Deceleration Time
▶PGmax: Max Pressure Gradient

The equations used for D Trace measurement are as follows:

5-13
 Operation Manual

Circumference and Area Measurement

Ellipse
This is a basic measurement that is available in all diagnosis modes. You can measure the circumference
and area of a circular (elliptical) object in a 2D image.
1. Select the softmenu button [2] Ellipse. “Ellipse” is displayed in the user information area.
2. Use the trackball and the Set button on the control panel to specify the diameter (axis) of the
measurement area.
▶ Place the cursor at a desired position with the trackball, and press the Set button

Repositioning Point
Tips!
Pressing the Update button before pressing the Set button to complete positioning resets the
position of a point just set.

3. Specify the size of the circle (ellipse).

▶ Adjust the size using the trackball, and press the Set button.
4. When the measurement is finished, its result is shown on the screen.

The equations used for ellipse measurement are as follows:

,
(A: Long axis, B: Short axis)

Area = , (a, b: Axis)

Trace
This is a basic measurement that is available in all diagnosis modes. You can measure the circumference
and area of an irregular object in a 2D image.
1. Press the Trace button on the control panel. Or select the softmenu button [2] Trace. “Trace” is
displayed in the user information area.
2. Use the trackball and the Set button on the control panel to specify the start point for tracing over
the contour of the measurement area.
▶ Place the cursor at a desired position with the trackball, and press the Set button.

3. Trace the curve so that the measurement cursor returns to the start point, and then press the Set
button.

5-14
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Editing Curve
Tips!
Before pressing the Set button to specify the end point, you can rotate the [5] Delete dial-button
on the softmenu to delete a part of the curve being traced.

NOTE: Trace lines must be closed. If you press the Set button before tracing is complete, tracing
may be done over a straight line between the current point and the start point, resulting in a
significant error.

4. When the measurement is finished, its result is shown on the screen.

The equations used for Trace measurement are as follows:

, (N = 1,2… last point)

, (N = 1,2… last point)

%StA
StA stands for Stenosis Area, which is a basic measurement available in all diagnosis modes. In a 2D image,
the area of a vessel is measured and the stenosis ratio (%) calculated.
1. Select %StA in the softmenu [2]. “%StA” will appear in the user information area.
2. Measure the area of the vessel outer wall using the Area measurement method.
3. When a new cursor appears, measure the inner wall area of the vessel under stenosis.
4. Calculate %StA with the following equation:
%StA = (Outer Area – Inner Area) / Outer Area × 100

Changing the Measurement menu

Tips!
Select the menu and then press the Update button before specifying the start point to change it
to Ellipse or Trace.

5-15
 Operation Manual

Volume Measurement
NOTE: Since Dual Mode simultaneously displays two images on the screen, you don’t have to
return to the diagnosis mode to measure volume in Dual Mode.

3 Distance
This is a basic measurement that is available in all diagnosis modes. You can measure the volume of an
object in a 2D image by using 3 straight lines.
1. Select the softmenu button [3] 3 Distance. “3 Distance” is displayed in the user information area.
2. Specify two points and measure the straight distance between them. The method for measuring a
line is the same as in “Distance.”
3. Measure the length of the remaining two straight lines as in the above. Measure other two distance
using the same method with 2.
4. When the measurement is finished, its result is shown on the screen. The volume of the object along
with the length of each straight line are calculated.
▶ Press the [6] Undo dial-button on the softmenu to cancel the current measurement and take it
again.

The equations used for 3 Distance measurement are as follows:

, (D: distance)

1 Distance
This is a basic measurement that is available in all diagnosis modes. You can measure the volume of an
object in a 2D image by using only one straight line.
1. Select the softmenu button [3] 1 Distance. “1 Distance” is displayed in the user information area.
2. Specify two points and measure the straight distance between them. The method for measuring a
line is the same as in “Distance.”
3. When the measurement is finished, its result is shown on the screen. The volume of the object along
with the length of the straight line are calculated.
The equations used for 1 Distance measurement are as follows:

5-16
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

, (D: distance)

Distance + Ellipse
This is a basic measurement that is available in all diagnosis modes. You can measure the volume of an
object in a 2D image by using one straight line and one circle (ellipse).
1. Select the softmenu button [3] Distance + Ellipse. “Distance + Ellipse” is displayed in the user
information area.
2. Specify two points and measure the straight distance between them. The method for measuring a
line is the same as in “ Distance.”
3. Specify the size of the circle (ellipse). The method for measuring a circle (ellipse) is the same as in
“Ellipse.”
4. When the measurement is finished, its result is shown on the screen.
▶ D: The length of a straight line ▶ Area: The area of a circle
▶ Long: The length of the long axis in an ellipse ▶ Vol.: Volume
▶ Short: The length of the short axis in an ellipse

▶ Press the [6] Undo dial-button on the softmenu to cancel the current measurement and take it
again.

The equations used for Distance + Ellipse measurement are as follows:

Ellipse
A basic measurement that is available in all diagnosis modes. In a 2D image, the volume of a conical object
is measured using an ellipse.
1. Select Ellipse in the softmenu [3]. ‘Ellipse” will appear in the user information area.
2. Set the size of the ellipse. The way it is measured is the same as in ‘Ellipse.’
3. Once measurement is done, the result is displayed on the screen.

The following equation is used for ‘Ellipse’ measurement:

5-17
 Operation Manual

MOD
A basic measurement that is available in all diagnosis modes. In a 2D image, the area of an irregular object
and the length of its long axis are obtained to calculate its volume. MOD is an abbreviation for ‘Method of
Disk.’
1. Select MOD in the softmenu [3]. “MOD” will appear in the user information area.
2. Draw a contour to measure. The way it is measured is the same as in ‘Trace.’
3. Measure the length of the long axis. The way it is measured is the same as in ‘Distance.’
4. Once measurement is done, the result is displayed on the screen.

5-18
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Calculations by Application
Press the Calculator button on the control panel.

Things to note
Before Taking Measurements
■■ Register Patient
Make sure that the currently registered patient information is correct. If the patient is not registered,
press the patient button on the control panel.
Use the Study Information tab to enter or change a patient’s information per diagnosis item.
For the Patient Information menu and entry method, refer to ‘Patient Information’ in Chapter 3. ‘Starting
Diagnosis’.

■■ Check Probe, Application & Preset

▶ Check the probe name and application that are displayed in the title bar. Press the Probe button
on the control panel to use another probe or application.
▶ Check the preset settings in the Probe Selection screen.

■■ Measurement Menu Settings

Set the related menus for convenient measurement. You can specify how an area and volume can
be calculated. Please refer to the “Setting Measurements” section in Chapter 7 “Utilities” for more
information on measurement menus and settings.

Measurement Operations
The following gives information on the common button operations for measurements:

■■ Select Measurement Item

After moving the cursor by using the trackball on the control panel, press the Set button.

5-19
 Operation Manual

Change Measurement Method

„„
Press the Update button on the control panel. If the current measurement item can be measured in more
than one way, the measurement method is changed. The current measurement method is displayed in
the user information area. Once measurement is started, it cannot be changed.

Delete Trace Line

„„
Delete a trace line by moving the trackball in the opposite direction. You can use this function only when
the doppler spectrum is traced manually.

Delete Measurement Result

„„
Press the Clear button on the control panel.

NOTE: The measurement results are deleted from the screen but still shown on the report for the
corresponding application.

Print Measurement Result

„„
Press the Print button on the control panel.

Exit Measurement
„„
Press the Calculator button again. Or press the Exit button.

End Diagnosis
„„
Press the End Exam button on the control panel. The diagnosis for the current patient ends and all
measurement results are saved.

5-20
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Soft Menu

[Figure 5.2 Calculation by Application - Softmenu]

■■ Package
Select a measurement package by rotating dial-button [1] beneath the soft menu.

■■ HR Cycle
Set the HR cycle by rotating dial-button [1] beneath the soft menu. This function is activated only when
‘HR’ is selected as the measurement item.

■■ Tab
Select a measurement tab by rotating dial-button [2] beneath the soft menu.

■■ Trace Direction
Set a trace direction for the doppler spectrum by rotating dial-button [2] beneath the soft menu. This
function activates only after Auto or Limited Trace is performed in Spectral Doppler mode.
▶ Up: Trace only positive part on the Doppler spectrum.
▶ Dn: Trace only negative part on the Doppler spectrum.
▶ All: Trace all Doppler spectrum.

■■ Laterality
Select the position of a measurement object, left (Lt) or Right (Rt) by rotating dial-button [3] beneath
the soft menu. Only specific packages are displayed on the soft menu.

■■ Select Fetus
Select a fetus for measurement by rotating dial-button [3] beneath the soft menu. Appears in the soft
menu only when Number of Fetuses for Fetal Heart or OB in Patient Information screen is set to 2 or
higher.

5-21
 Operation Manual

■■ Threshold
Select a value by rotating dial-button [3] beneath the soft menu. This function activates only after
Auto or Limited Trace is performed in Spectral Doppler Mode. Adjusting the threshold values will help
contour the doppler spectrum.

■■ Result Action
Set a location for a measurement result by rotating dial-button [4] beneath the soft menu.

■■ Move / Reset
Perform Result Action by pressing dial-button [4] beneath the soft menu.
▶ Move: Changes the location where measurement result values are displayed. Change the location
using the trackball and press the Set button.
▶ Reset: Resets the location where measurement result values are displayed.

When there are too many measurement data and they cannot all be displayed on the screen at one
Tips!
time, the Move button can be used to navigate through the measurement data.

■■ Undo
Cancel the last measurement by pressing dial-button [5] beneath the soft menu.

5-22
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Common Measurement Methods

This section provides information on the common measurement methods used for applications.

Measurements in Spectral Doppler Mode

In general, if you trace a Doppler spectrum, you can obtain results for various measurement items
automatically. There are 3 ways to trace a Doppler spectrum.
EKO 7 also allows you to select a specific item under the measurement menu and take measurements
individually without tracing a Doppler spectrum.

■■ Auto Trace
A spectrum is traced automatically. It is enabled in the measurement menu in Spectral Doppler Mode.
1. Press Auto Trace in the measurement menu.
2. The system traces a spectrum automatically.
3. When Trace is complete, the measurement results are displayed on the screen.

5-23
 Operation Manual

Things to consider for Doppler Spectrum Auto Trace

Tips!
The state of a Doppler spectrum may affect measurement results. Please see the following:

Causes for Trace Failure

XX
If Gain is changed for a Doppler image in the Freeze state, Contour Trace and Peak Trace will not
work.
XX
If there is little or no noise in an image without a spectrum, Contour Trace will not work.
XX
If there is severe noise in an image, Contour Trace will not work.
XX
If the Clutter filter is set too high, Auto Trace or Limited Trace may not work.

Causes for Inaccurate Peak Trace

XX
If PRF (Pulse Repetition Frequency) is lower than the velocity of the observation area, aliasing
may occur. If the original signals are separated from aliasing, Trace can be done but the peak
measurement may not be accurate.
XX
If the peak of a spectral waveform is not clear or occurs intermittently, Trace can be done but the
peak measurement may not be accurate.
XX
If the Doppler Gain is set to high or low, it becomes difficult to distinguish spectrums. This may
result in measurement error(s).
XX
If the Wall Filter is set too high, only part of the spectrum is displayed. In this case, Trace can be
done but Peak measurement may not be accurate.
XX
If abnormal noise or artifact occurs, Trace can be done but Peak measurement may not be
accurate.

Misc.

XX
Use of the CW Probe may result in measurement error(s).
XX
Limited Trace is supported only for two-peak spectrums such as Mitral Valve Inflow and Tricuspid
Valve Inflow in the cardiology application.

■■ Limited Trace
If you specify a measurement range, a spectrum is traced automatically. It is enabled in the menu in
Spectral Doppler Mode.
1. Press Limited Trace in the Measurement menu. A bar appears allowing you to specify a
measurement area.
2. Specify the measurement range.
▶ Place the bar at a desired position with the trackball, and press the Set button.
3. The system traces spectrums within the specified range automatically.
4. When Trace is complete, the measurement results are displayed on the screen.

5-24
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

■■ Manual Trace
A spectrum is traced manually. It is enabled in the menu in Spectral Doppler Mode.
1. Press Manual Trace in the Measurement menu. A measurement cursor appears over a spectrum.
2. Trace the spectrum. The measuring method is the same as in “D Trace.”
3. When Trace is complete, the measurement results are displayed on the screen.

■■ Itemized Measurement
In the Measurement menu, select an individual item and take a measurement.
1. Press the Calculator button on the control panel after obtaining a desired image.
2. Select a desired item in the Measurement menu. The “+” cursor appears over a spectral waveform.
3. Position the “+” cursor and press the Set button.
4. The measurement results for the selected item are displayed on the screen.

Measurement items for Doppler Spectrum are as follows:

Item Type Unit Equation

PSV (Peak Systolic Velocity) Velocity cm/s or m/s

EDV (End Diastolic Velocity) Velocity cm/s or m/s
TAMV (Time Average Mean Velocity) Velocity cm/s or m/s
TAPV (Time Average Peak Velocity) Velocity cm/s or m/s
PGmean (Mean Pressure Gradient) Calculation mmHg
PGmax (Max Pressure Gradient) Calculation mmHg 4 × PSV 2
S/D (Ratio of PSV to EDV) Calculation Ratio (PSV / EDV)
D/S (Ratio of EDV to PSV) Calculation Ratio EDV /PSV
RI (Resistivity Index) Calculation Ratio (PSV – EDV) / PSV
PI (Pulsatility Index) Calculation Ratio (PSV – EDV) / Vmean

5-25
 Operation Manual

Taking measurements via Auto Calc

Tips!
You can use Auto Calc to take measurements on predetermined item(s).
Items measured are as follows. For information on setting measurement item(s), please refer to
“Auto Calc” in Chapter 7 ‘Utilities.’
Peak Systolic Velocity (PSV) Time Averaged Mean Velocity (TAMV)
End Diastolic Velocity (EDV) Diastole / Systole Ratio (D/S)
Time Averaged Peak Velocity (TAPV) Max Pressure Gradient (PGmax)
Resistive Index (RI) Mean Pressure Gradient (PGmean)
Pulsatility Index (PI) Velocity Time Integral (VTI)
Systole / Diastole Ratio (S/D) PeakA

Volume Flow Measurement

Select Volume Flow in the measurement menu.
Volume Flow allows you to measure and calculate an area or distance. For information on distance or
area measurements, please refer to “Basic Measurements.” The TAMV (Time Avg. Mean Velocity) value is
automatically measured.

■■ Vesl. Area (Vessel Area)

Measure the area of a blood vessel and calculate TAMV and Volume Flow.

■■ Vesl. Dist. (Vessel Distance)

Measure the width of a blood vessel and calculate TAMV and Volume Flow.

5-26
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Stenosis Measurement
You can measure the stenosis of each blood vessel system by measuring and calculating an area or
distance.

■■ % StA
Measure the area of the inner and outer walls of a blood vessel. StA stands for Stenosis Area.
1. Select the %StA menu and the first cursor will appear in 2D Mode.
2. Measure the area of the vessel’s outer wall using the Circ/Area measurement method.
3. When the second cursor appears, measure the area of the vessel’s inner wall under stenosis.
%Stenosis Area. = (Outer Area – Inner Area) / Outer Area × 100

■■ % StD
Measure the diameter of a blood vessel. StD stands for Stenosis Distance.
1. Select the %StD menu and the first cursor will appear in 2D Mode.
2. Measure the total diameter of a blood vessel using the Distance measurement method.
3. When the second cursor appears, measure the diameter of the vessel’s inner wall under stenosis.
%Stenosis Dist. = (Outer Distance – Inner Distance) / Outer Distance × 100

Heart Rate Measurement

■■ HR (Heart Rate)
You can calculate heart rates for a certain period of time.
1. Select HR in the measurement menu. A bar appears allowing you to specify a measurement area.
2. Specify the measurement range.
▶ Place the bar at a desired position with the trackball, and press the Set button.

3. The system measures the heart rate within the specified range automatically. The measurement
results are displayed on the screen.

5-27
 Operation Manual

Cardiac Calculations

NOTE: Cardiac measurement is an optional item.

The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement. Measured items are
automatically recorded in a report.

NOTE:
XX
For information on basic measurement methods, see ‘Basic Measurements’ and ‘Common
Measurement Methods’.
XX
For references on measurement items, see the Reference Manual – Part 1.
XX
For detailed information on stress echo and strain, refer to ‘Chapter 7. Utilities’.

Adult Echo Measurement Menu

[Figure 5.3 Adult Echo Measurement Menu]

5-28
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

All LVd (2D) All Continuous measurement

IVSd All Distance cm, mm
LVIDd All Distance cm, mm
LVPWd All Distance cm, mm
All LVs (2D) All Continuous measurement
IVSs All Distance cm, mm
LV / RV (2D)
LVIDs All Distance cm, mm
LVPWs All Distance cm, mm
RVIDd All Distance cm, mm
RVAWd All Distance cm, mm
RVIDs All Distance cm, mm
RVAWs All Distance cm, mm
All LV/RV (M) M Continuous measurement
All LV (M) M Continuous measurement
IVSd M Distance cm, mm
LVIDd M Distance cm, mm
LVPWd M Distance cm, mm
IVSs M Distance cm, mm
LVIDs M Distance cm, mm
LVPWs M Distance cm, mm
LV / RV (M)
All RV (M) M Continuous measurement
RVIDd M Distance cm, mm
RVAWd M Distance cm, mm
RVIDs M Distance cm, mm
RVAWs M Distance cm, mm
Time Septal to PW M Time ms
TAPSE LV M Distance cm, mm
TAPSE RV M Distance cm, mm
LA/Ao (2D) All Distance cm, mm
LA/Ao (M) M Distance cm, mm
LA / Ao Ao Diam (M) M Distance cm, mm
LA Diam (M) M Distance cm, mm
LVOT Diam All Distance cm, mm
LAAd A2C All 2D Trace cm2, mm2
LAAs A2C All 2D Trace cm2, mm2
LA LAAd A4C All 2D Trace cm2, mm2
LAAs A4C All 2D Trace cm2, mm2
LA Major All Distance cm, mm
LVEDV A4C All Dist 20 ml
LVESV A4C All Dist 20 ml
LV Vol. (Simpson)
LVEDV A2C All Dist 20 ml
LVESV A2C All Dist 20 ml

5-29
 Operation Manual

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

AR VCW ALL Distance Cm, mm

AV Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
AV VTI PW M Trace(D) cm, mm
AV Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Desc. Ao Vel. PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
AV
AV AccT PW Time ms
AV DecT PW Time ms
AR Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
AR PHT PW Time ms
Q to AV Open M Time ms
LVOT Diam All Distance cm, mm
AVA (VTI) LVOT VTI PW MTrace(D) cm, mm
AV VTI PW MTrace(D) cm, mm
AR PISA Rad C PISA-Radius cm, mm
AR Alias Vel. C Velocity cm/s, m/s
PISA (AR)
AR VTI PW MTrace(D) cm, mm
AR Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
MR VCW ALL Distance cm, mm
MV Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
MV E/A PW Velocity
MV Peak E PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
MV Peak A PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
MV PHT PW Time ms
MV MV VTI PW MTrace(D) cm, mm
MV DecT PW Time ms
MR Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
MR VTI PW MTrace(D) cm, mm
MR Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Calculated after
MR dp / dt PW mmHg/s
time measurement
MR PISA Rad C PISA-Radius cm, mm
MR Alias Vel. C Velocity cm/s, m/s
PISA (MR)
MR Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
MR VTI PW MTrace(D) cm, mm
TR VCW ALL Distance cm, mm
TV Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
TV PHT PW Time ms
TV
TV VTI PW MTrace(D) cm, mm
TV DecT PW Time ms
TR Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
TR Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
RVSP
RAP PW RAP mmHg

5-30
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

PR VCW ALL Distance cm,mm

PV Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PV Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
PV AccT PW Time ms
PV
PR Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PR Vmax PW Velocity Cm/s, m/s
PR PHT PW Time ms
PR End Vel. PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
P Vein S/D PW Continuous measurement
P Vein S Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Plum. Veins P Vein D Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
P Vein A Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
P Vein A Dur PW Time ms
H Vein S/D PW Continuous measurement
H Vein S Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Hepatic Veins H Vein D Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
H Vein A Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
H Vein A Dur PW Time ms
All LV TDI PW Continuous measurement
LV Peak E’ PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
LV Peak A’ PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
LV Peak S’ PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
All RV TDI PW Continuous measurement
RV Peak E’ PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Tissue Doppler
RV Peak A’ PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
RV Peak S’ PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
All LV Lat TDI PW Continuous measurement
LV Lat Peak E’ PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
LV Lat Peak A’ PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
LV Lat Peak S’ PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
LVOT Diam All Distance cm, mm
RVOT Diam All Distance cm, mm
Qp / Qs
Systemic VTI PW MTrace(D) cm, mm
Pulmonic VTI PW MTrace(D) cm, mm
HR HR M, PW Heart Rate bpm

■■ Dist20
Traces the cardiac circumference and then draw the cardiac axis. The system automatically draws 20
straight lines perpendicular to the axis and calculates its volume.

5-31
 Operation Manual

NOTE:
XXMR dp/dt can be measured at 1-3m/s only.
XX
In Dual 2D Mode, two images can be viewed simultaneously.
XX
For RVAWd, RVIDd, RVAWs, and RVIDs, see the LV measurement method.
XX
MPA Diam, RPA Diam, and LPA Diam are measured under Aortic Valve Level in Parasternal Short Axis.
XX
C Mode is mainly used for measuring reverse cardiac blood flow.
XX
As PISA-Radius or PISA-Alias Vel. measurements require Velocity values, you have to select color display
for Velocity or Vel + Var in C Mode. For more information, see the ‘Color Doppler Mode’ section in
Chapter 4. “Diagnosis Mode”.
XX
Tissue Doppler can be measured in TDI Mode.

Ped Echo Measurement Menu

[Figure 5.4 Ped Echo Measurement Menu]

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

All LVd (2D) All Continuous measurement
RVIDd All Distance cm, mm
IVSd All Distance cm, mm
LVIDd All Distance cm, mm
LVPWd All Distance cm, mm
LV / RV (2D)
All LVs (2D) All Continuous measurement
IVSs All Distance cm, mm
LVIDs All Distance cm, mm
LVPWs All Distance cm, mm
RVAWd All Distance cm, mm

5-32
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

All LV/RV (M) M Continuous measurement
All LV (M) M Continuous measurement
RVIDd M Distance cm, mm
IVSd M Distance cm, mm
LVIDd M Distance cm, mm
LVPWd M Distance cm, mm
LV / RV (M) IVSs M Distance cm, mm
LVIDs M Distance cm, mm
LVPWs M Distance cm, mm
RVAWd M Distance cm, mm
Time Septal to PW M Time ms
TAPSE LV M Distance cm, mm
TAPSE RV M Distance cm, mm
LVEDV A4C All Dist 20 ml
LVESV A4C All Dist 20 ml
LV Vol. (Simpson)
LVEDV A2C All Dist 20 ml
LVESV A2C All Dist 20 ml
Ao Diam (M) M Distance cm, mm
LA Diam (M) M Distance cm, mm
AV LVET M Time ms
Q to AV Open M Time ms
Desc. Ao Vel. PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
All MV (M) M Continuous measurement
MV D-E Excursion M DE cm, mm
MV D-E Slope M DE cm/s, m/s
MV
MV E-F Slope M EF cm/s, m/s
MV EPSS M EPSS cm, mm
MV A-C Interval M A-C ms
IVSd M Distance cm, mm
LV Mass LVIDd M Distance cm, mm
LVPWd M Distance cm, mm
P Vein S/D PW Continuous measurement
P Vein S Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Plum. Veins P Vein D Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
P Vein A Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
P Vein A Dur PW Time ms
H Vein S/D PW Continuous measurement
H Vein D Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Hepatic Veins H Vein S Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
H Vein A Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
H Vein A Dur PW Time ms

5-33
 Operation Manual

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

RA Major All Distance cm, mm
TV Diam 1 All Distance cm, mm
Rt. Inflow TR Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
RAP PW RAP mmHg
TV E/A PW Continuous measurement
LA Diam (2D) All Distance cm, mm
MV Diam 1 All Distance cm, mm
MV E-DT-A PW Continuous measurement
Lt. Inflow
MR Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
MV DecT PW Time ms
MR dp/dt PW Time mmHg/s
RVOT Diam All Distance cm, mm
PV Ann Diam All Distance cm, mm
PV AccT PW Time ms
Rt. Outflow
PR DecT PW Time ms
PR Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
PR PHT PW PHT ms
LVOT Diam All Distance cm, mm
AV Diam All Distance cm, mm
Lt. Outflow
Ao Sinus Diam All Distance cm, mm
Ao Diam (2D) All Distance cm, mm
Ao ST Junct Diam All Distance cm, mm
Asc Ao Diam All Distance cm, mm
Ao Arch Diam All Distance cm, mm
Ao Isth Diam All Distance cm, mm
Lt. Outflow Desc Ao Diam All Distance cm, mm
AV Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
AR DecT PW Time ms
AR ed Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
AR PHT PW PHT ms

5-34
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

MPA Diam All Distance cm, mm
RPA Diam All Distance cm, mm
LPA Diam All Distance cm, mm
SVC Diam, Exp All Distance cm, mm
SVC Diam, Insp All Distance cm, mm
SVC S/D PW Continuous measurement
SVC A Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
SVC A Dur PW Time ms
Shunts IVC Diam, Exp All Distance cm, mm
IVC Diam, Insp All Distance cm, mm
IVC S/D PW Continuous measurement
IVC A Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
IVC A Dur PW Time ms
RVOT Diam All Distance cm, mm
RVOT VTI PW MTrace(D) cm, mm
LVOT Diam All Distance cm, mm
LVOT VTI PW MTrace(D) cm, mm
All LV TDI PW Continuous measurement
LV Peak E’ PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
LV Peak A’ PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
LV Peak S’ PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
All RV TDI PW Continuous measurement
RV Peak E’ PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Tissue Doppler
RV Peak A’ PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
RV Peak S’ PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
All LV Lat TDI PW Continuous measurement
LV Lat Peak E’ PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
LV Lat Peak A’ PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
LV Lat Peak S’ PW Velocity cm/s, m/s

5-35
 Operation Manual

Vascular Calculations
The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement. Measured items are
automatically recorded in a report.

NOTE:
XX
For information on basic measurements, please refer to “Basic Measurements” in this chapter.
XX
For references on measurement items, please refer to “Reference Manual – Part 1.”

Carotid Measurement Menu

[Figure 5.5 Carotid Measurement Menu]

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace

PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Subclavian A %StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
Prox CCA
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
IMT All Distance cm, mm

5-36
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace

PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
Mid CCA
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
IMT All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
Distal CCA
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
IMT All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
Bulb
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm , mm2
2

Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

IMT All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
Prox ICA
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
IMT All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
Mid ICA
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
IMT All Distance cm, mm

5-37
 Operation Manual

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace

PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
Distal ICA
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
IMT All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
ECA
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
IMT All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Vetebral A %StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm , mm2
2

Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
General %StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Volume Flow(Auto) PW Automatic calculation ml/m
Volume Flow(D) PW Automatic calculation ml/m
Volume Flow TAMV PW Spectrum Trace cm/s, m/s
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
HR HR PW Heart Rate bpm

5-38
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Auto IMT (Optional)

This function allows you to take IMT measurement easily and quickly.

NOTE:
Auto IMT is available only under the following conditions:
XX
Probe: Linear Probe
XX
Application: Vascular
XX
Diagnosis Mode: 2D, C or PD Mode(but the button is enabled in 2D menu)

Auto IMT Screen

■■ Risk Color Bar
It is shown in colors based on the IMT thickness. If the thickness is <= 0.5 mm, the entire bar is shown
in green. If the thickness is >= 1.1 mm, the entire bar is shown in red. For a thickness between these
values, it is shown in the corresponding color.

■■ Rular and Range Bar

Use the trackball and Set button to specify the location and range at which IMT will be measured.
▶ Rular: The grid unit is 10 mm. This option is used when a vessel is lying laterally. At the
measurement location, press the Set button to take IMT measurement at 10 mm interval.
▶ Range Bar: This option is used when a vessel is not lying laterally, or the length of a specific
segment is measured. Press and hold the Set button at the start point, and then drag the trackball
to specify the end point.

■■ Intima and Adventitia Pair

▶ Between the Near and Far zones, the one with the higher QI is automatically selected as a
measurement value and it is represented by the color of the Risk Color Bar.
▶ A pair with lower QI is represented in dark sky blue.

▶ Press the Update button on the control panel to move the Near and Far zones that are
automatically selected with QI. The measurement value and color presentation are also changed.
However, if QI is 0, it will not be changed.

■■ Measure Result Table

▶ Max: The maximum thickness of the Intima/Adventitia pair.

5-39
 Operation Manual

▶ Mean: The average thickness of the Intima/Adventitia pair.

▶ SD : Standard Deviation

▶ QI: The distance ratio of the measured point in a distance for Quality Index measurement.

▶ Points: The total number of the measured Intima/Adventitia pairs.

[Figure 5.6 Auto IMT]

Auto IMT Measurement

1. After checking the probe, application and preset, start carotid measurement.
2. If the desired images are obtained, press Freeze. Use the trackball to select an image for IMT
measurement.
3. Press the [1] Auto IMT dial-button on the softmenu. The Auto IMT screen will appear.

Automatic blood vessel location function

Tips!
IMT measurement will be performed automatically if the blood vessel image is in the center of the
scanned image. In addition, if the blood vessel is scanned horizontally, the blood vessel direction will be
found automatically.
4. Use the trackball and the Set button to set a location for IMT measurement.

5-40
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Tips! Operation #1, #2

If Operation #1, #2 in the user information area is followed, IMT measurement can be taken more easily.

▶ Select a point between Near and Far.

▶ If the vessel image quality is poor, select an area that is close to the Intima to be measured.
▶ If a detailed area has to be selected, use Range Bar.
▶ Press Space Bar in the keyboard to turn on/off the Intima and Adventitia Marker.

5. Once the measurement location is set, measurement values are listed in a table. To select another
Cine image for measurement, press the soft menu dial-button [6] Exit or the Exit button on the
control panel. Press the 2D dial-button to scan and measure again.

Auto IMT Measurements Analysis

1. Press the [4] Analysis dial-button on the softmenu. The Analysis screen will appear.
2. Use the trackball and the Set button to select the desired analysis from Framingham, Risk Factor,
Normal IMT and User Graph. Use the trackball and the Set button or rotate the [4] dial-button on the
softmenu to select.
▶ Bars corresponding to the measurement results will be shown on each graph. However, bars are
not shown when the measurement results are smaller than the Framingham Risk Factor.

User Graph
Tips!
User Graph can be used to customize a graph for better analysis of measurement results.

3. Press the [4] Analysis dial-button on the softmenu again to complete analysis.

The following materials were referred to when analyzing the measurements of Auto IMT.

■■ Framingham
Correlation between the Framingham Risk Score and Intima Media Thickness: the Paroi Arterielle et
Risque Cardio-vasculair (PARC) Study.
Pierre-Jean Touboul, EricVicaut, Julien Labreuche, Jean-Pierre Belliard, Serge Cohen, Serge Kownator,
Jean-Jacques Portal, Isabelle Pithois-Merli, Pierre Amarenco. On behalf of PARC Study participating
physicians.

5-41
 Operation Manual

■■ Risk Factor
Mannheim Carotid Intima-Media Thickness Consensus (2004~2006)
P.-J. Touboul, M.G. Hennerici, S.Meairs, H.Adams, P.Amarenco, N.Borstein, L.Csiba, M.Desvarieux,
S.Ebrahim, M.Fatar, R.Hermandez Hernandez, M.Jaff, S.Kownator, P.Prati, T.Rundek, M.Sitzer, U.Schiminke,
J.-C. Tardif, A.Taylor, E.Vicaut, K.S.Woo, F.Zannad, M.Zureik

■■ Normal IMT
Simon A, Gariepy J, Chironi G, Megnien JL, Levenson J: Intima-media thickness: a new tool for diagnosis
and treatment of cardiovascular risk. Journal of Hypertension 20:159-169, 2002

[Figure 5.7 Analysis]

5-42
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Saving Auto IMT Measurement Values

1. Use the [1] Direction dial-button on the softmenu to select the direction of the measurement area.
2. Use the [2] Position dial-button on the softmenu to select the location of the measurement area.
3. Use the [1] – [3] dial-button on the softmenu to choose a name for the measurement area. Press the
button to save measurement values and exit Auto IMT Measurement Mode. The saved values will be
displayed in the left hand side of the screen.

Arterial Measurement Menu

[Figure 5.8 Arterial Measurement Menu]

5-43
 Operation Manual

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Subclabian A %StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm , mm2
2

Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Axillary A %StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm , mm2
2

Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Brachial A %StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm , mm2
2

Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Radial A %StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm , mm2
2

Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Ulnar A %StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

5-44
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
SPA %StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm , mm2
2

Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
General (UE A) EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm , mm2
2

Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

Automatic
Volume Flow(Auto) PW ml/m
Calculation
Automatic
Volume Flow(D) PW ml/m
Vol. Flow (UE A) Calculation
TAMV PW Spectrum Trace cm/s, m/s
Vesl. Dist. All Distance cm, mm
Vesl. Area. All Area cm2, mm2
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
CIA EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm , mm2
2

Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

5-45
 Operation Manual

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
IIA EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
EIA EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm , mm2
2

Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
CFA EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm , mm2
2

Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
SFA EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm , mm2
2

Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

5-46
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
DFA EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Popliteal A EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm , mm2
2

Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
ATA EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm , mm2
2

Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
PTA EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm , mm2
2

Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

5-47
 Operation Manual

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Peroneal A EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
DPA EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm , mm2
2

Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
MPA EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm , mm2
2

Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
LPA EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm , mm2
2

Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

5-48
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Metatarsal A EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Digital A EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm , mm2
2

Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
General (LE A) EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm , mm2
2

Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

Automatic
Volume Flow(Auto) PW ml/m
Calculation
Automatic
Volume Flow(D) PW ml/m
Vol. Flow (LE A) Calculation
TAMV PW Spectrum Trace cm/s, m/s
Vesl. Dist. All Distance cm, mm
Vesl. Area. All Area cm2, mm2
HR HR M. PW Heart Rate bpm

5-49
 Operation Manual

Venous Measurement Menu

[Figure 5.9 Venous Measurement Menu]

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Internal Jugular V Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Dur T PW Time ms
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Innominate V Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Dur T PW Time ms
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

5-50
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Subclavian V Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Dur T PW Time ms
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Axillary V Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Dur T PW Time ms
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Brachial V Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Dur T PW Time ms
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Cephalic V Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Dur T PW Time ms
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Basilic V Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Dur T PW Time ms
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

5-51
 Operation Manual

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Radial V Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Dur T PW Time ms
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Ulnar V Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Dur T PW Time ms
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
General (UE Vein) Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Dur T PW Time ms
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
CIV Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Dur T PW Time ms
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
IIV Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Dur T PW Time ms
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

5-52
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
EIV Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Dur T PW Time ms
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
CFV Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Dur T PW Time ms
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PFV Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Dur T PW Time ms
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
SFV Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Dur T PW Time ms
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
GSV Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Dur T PW Time ms
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

5-53
 Operation Manual

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Popliteal V Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Dur T PW Time ms
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
LSV Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Dur T PW Time ms
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
ATV Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Dur T PW Time ms
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PTV Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Dur T PW Time ms
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Peroneal Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Dur T PW Time ms
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

5-54
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
General (LE Vein) Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Dur T PW Time ms
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

5-55
 Operation Manual

Renal Measurement Menu

[Figure 5.10 Renal Measurement Menu]

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace

Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Mid Aorta
EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

5-56
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Celiac A EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Splenic A EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
C Hepatic A EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
R Hepatic A EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm , mm2
2

Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

5-57
 Operation Manual

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
L Hepatic A EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Mid SMA EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
IMA EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Mid IVC Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Dur T PW Time ms
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

5-58
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Renal A EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Renal V Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Dur T All Time ms
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Arcuate A EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm , mm2
2

Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
M Portal V Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Dur T PW Time ms
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
M Hepatic V Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Dur T PW Time ms
Vesl. Area All Area cm , mm2
2

Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

5-59
 Operation Manual

Fetal Echo Calculations

The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement. In addition, measurement
items are similar to those for cardiac calculation.
Measured items are automatically recorded in a report.

NOTE:
XXFor information on basic measurement methods, see ‘Basic Measurements’ and ‘Common
Measurement Methods’.
XX
For references on measurement items, see the Reference Manual – Part 1.

Fetal Echo Measurement Menu

[Figure 5.11 Fetal Echo Measurement Menu]

5-60
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

LVEDV A2C All Dist 20 ml
LVESV A2C All Dist 20 ml
LV Vol. (Simpson)
LVEDV A4C All Dist 20 ml
LVESV A4C All Dist 20 ml
Asc Ao All Distance cm, mm
MPA Diam All Distance cm, mm
Duct Art All Distance cm, mm
LA Diam All Distance cm, mm
RA Diam All Distance cm, mm
RV Diam All Distance cm, mm
2D Echo
IVS All Distance cm, mm
LVIDd All Distance cm, mm
LVIDs All Distance cm, mm
LVPW All Distance cm, mm
HrtC All Circumference cm, mm
ThC All Circumference cm, mm
Continuous
CTAR All (D) All %
Measurement
ThD ap All Distance cm, mm
ThD trans All Distance cm, mm
HrtD ap All Distance cm, mm
CTAR
HrtD trans All Distance cm, mm
Continuous
CTAR All (A) All %
Measurement
ThA All Area cm2, mm2

HrtA All Area cm2, mm2

Continuous
Fetal M-mode (All) M cm, mm
Measurement
IVSd M Distance cm, mm
LVIDd M Distance cm, mm
Fetal M-mode LVPWd M Distance cm, mm
IVSs M Distance cm, mm
LVIDs M Distance cm, mm
LVPWs M Distance cm, mm
RVDd M Distance cm, mm

5-61
 Operation Manual

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

MPA M Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Duct Art. M Trace PW Spectrum Trace
IVC M Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Duct V All PW Spectrum Trace
Asc Aorta M Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Dsc Aorta M Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Continuous
MV E/A PW
Measurement
MR Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Continuous
TV E/A PW
Measurement
TR Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Continuous
PLI All PW
Measurement
PLI PLI S Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
PLI A Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
PLI D Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Continuous
All Tei Index PW
Measurement
Tei Index
TST PW Time ms
ET PW Time ms
Fetal HR M. PW Heart Rate bpm

■■ CTAR (Cardio-Thorax Area Ratio)

This measurement is for comparing the sizes of the fetus’ chest and heart. The comparison is made by
obtaining the ThD ap, ThD trans, HrtD ap, and HrtD trans values.

5-62
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

TCD Calculations
The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement. Measured items are
automatically recorded in a report.

NOTE: For information on basic measurement methods, see ‘Basic Measurements’ and ‘Common
Measurement Methods’.

TCD Measurement Menu

[Figure 5.12 TCD Measurement Menu]

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
ACA EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm , mm2
2

Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
MCA
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s

5-63
 Operation Manual

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
MCA %StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
PCA (P1) EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm , mm2
2

Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
PCA (P2) EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm , mm2
2

Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Dist Basilar A EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

5-64
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Mid Basilar A
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
Mid Basilar A %StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm , mm2
2

Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Prox Basilar A EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm , mm2
2

Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

Auto Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace PW Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace PW Spectrum Trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
General EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
%StA All Area %
%StD All Distance %
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Volume Flow(Auto) PW Automatic Calculation ml/m
Volume Flow(D) PW Automatic Calculation ml/m
Volume Flow TAMV PW Spectrum Trace cm/s, m/s
Vesl. Dist. All Distance cm, mm
Vesl. Area. All Area cm2, mm2

5-65
 Operation Manual

OB Calculations
NOTE:
XX
Ductus Venosus, Fetal HR can only be measured in Doppler Mode.
XX
For information on basic measurement methods, see Basic Measurements and Common
Measurement Methods.
XX
For references on measurement items, see the Reference Manual-Part 2.

Before Taking OB Measurements

OB Basic Information
„„
Enter the information required for OB diagnosis in the Patient Information window. The basic OB
information includes LMP (Last Menstrual Period) and Gestations.
Once LMP is entered, EDD (Estimated Delivery Date) and GA (Gestational Age) are calculated
automatically. LMP is required for the calculation of values such as EDD and SD in obstetrics
measurement.

EDD(LMP) = LMP + 280 days

XX

GA(LMP) = Current System Date - LMP

XX
When you input Ovulation Date, it creates LMP and GA(LMP), EDD(LMP) automatically.

LMP = Ovul. Date -14

XX
Regardless of LMP, enter the EDD with a physicians opinion into ‘Estab. Due Date’. If LMP is not
available, when Estab. Due Date is modified, LMP is automatically calculated and the ‘C’ mark is
displayed next to the LMP information.
A maximum of four fetuses can be entered in the Number of the fetus menu. The default value is '1'.
In the case of twins, enter '2'.
For further information about patient information menus and how to input patient information,
refer to ‘Entering Patient Data’ in Chapter 3 ‘Starting Diagnosis’.

OB Measurement Menu Settings

„„
Set up the GA Equation, GA Table and OB measurement menus that are used in obstetrics
measurements. The user can manually write, back up or restore GA Tables. For more information on
the GA Equation and Table, refer to the Reference Manual.

NOTE: For twins, distinguish fetuses by specifying them as Fetus A and B in the Measurement
menu. To change between the fetuses for measurement purposes, use the soft menu’s dial button
[3] Select Fetus.

Refer to the ‘Setting Measurements’ section in ‘Chapter 7 Utilities’ for additional information.
5-66
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Early OB Measurement Menu

When the measurements for the selected items are complete, the measurements and gestational
age are displayed on the screen. The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic
measurement. Measured items are automatically recorded in a report.

[Figure 5.13 Early OB Measurement Menu]

Item Sub-Item Mode Method Unit

GS - All Distance cm, mm

YS - All Distance cm, mm
CRL - All Distance cm, mm
NT - All Distance mm
NB - All Distance cm, mm
BPD - All Distance cm, mm
FL - All Distance cm, mm
Circumference or Auto
AC - All cm, mm
Calculation
Duct V All PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Duct V S Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Duct Venosus
Duct V D Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Duct V A Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
EFW - All Velocity

5-67
 Operation Manual

Automatic Calculation
Some items in the measurement menu are automatically calculated based on measurements of other
items.

HC
„„
This is automatically calculated using the following formula, provided there are measured BPD and
OFD values.

Exception: when you use Merz reference,

AC
„„
This is automatically calculated using the following formula, provided there are measured APD and
TAD values.

Exception: when you use Merz reference,

FTA
„„
This is automatically calculated using the following formula, provided there are measured APD and
TAD values.
FTA = π × ( APD × TAD) / 4

MAD
„„
This is automatically calculated using the following formula, provided there are measured APD and
TAD values.
MAD = ( APD + TAD ) / 2

ThC
„„
This is automatically calculated using the following formula, provided there are measured APTD
and TTD values.
ThC = π × ( APTD 2 + TTD 2 ) ÷ 2

APTD x TTD
„„
This is automatically calculated, provided there are measured APTD and TTD values.

5-68
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

NOTE: For reference, the Osaka University/Tokyo University methods are mainly used in Asia, the
Merz method in Europe, and the Shepard/Hadlock methods on the American continent.

General OB Measurement Menu

When the measurements for the selected items are complete, the measurements and gestational
age are displayed on the screen. The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic
measurement. Measured items are automatically recorded in a report.

[Figure 5.14 General OB Measurement Menu]

Item Sub-Item Mode Method Unit

BPD - All Distance cm, mm
OFD - All Distance cm, mm
Circumference or Auto
HC - All cm, mm
Calculation
APD - All Distance cm, mm

5-69
 Operation Manual

Item Sub-Item Mode Method Unit

TAD - All Distance cm, mm
Circumference or Auto
AC - All cm, mm
Calculation
FL - All Distance cm, mm
HUM - All Distance cm, mm
CM - All Distance cm, mm
Lat Vent - All Distance cm, mm
CEREB - All Distance cm, mm
NF - All Distance cm, mm
AFI All All Distance cm, mm
Q1 All Distance cm, mm
AFI Q2 All Distance cm, mm
Q3 All Distance cm, mm
Q4 All Distance cm, mm
MVP - All Circumference cm, mm
Cervix L - All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace
Limited Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace
Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Mid Cereb A
EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Umbilical A
Lt. Uterine A Calculation after Area
%StA All %
Rt. Uterine A Measurement
Calculation after Distance
%StD All %
Measurement
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Fetal HR - M, PW Heart Rate bpm
EFW - All

5-70
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

AFI(Amniotic Fluid Index)

Measure the amniotic fluid index. Measurements are performed by dividing the pregnant woman’s
abdomen into four parts. The distance between the fetus and the farthest point of each area
is measured. To obtain a specific image from each quadrant plane, press the Freeze button to go
to the diagnosis mode. After obtaining the image, press the Freeze button again to return to the
measurement mode.

Calculating Estimated Fetal Weight (EFW)

When measurements for the following items are complete, the system uses the results to calculate
the estimated fetal weight automatically. For an equation for calculating fetal weight, please refer to
‘Estimated Fetal Weight Formula’ in the Reference Manual Part 2.

BPD, AC
XX AC, FL
XX
BPD, FL, FTA
XX BPD, AC, FL
XX
BPD, APTD, TTD, FL
XX HC, AC, FL
XX
BPD, APTD, TTD, SL
XX BPD, HC, AC, FL
XX
BPD, TTD
XX AC
XX

Continuous Measurement / Review for EFW Calculation

You can measure OB item(s) continuously for EFW calculation.

Before starting measurement:

Tips!
Check EFW Reference. You can select or change it from Utility > Measure Setup > OB > Tables.

Measurement Methods
„„

1. Press EFW in the measurement menu.

2. Measure the items for EFW calculation using the trackball and the Set button.

3. Press the Freeze button to measure the next item. Measurement is taken.

4. Once all measurements have been taken, the EFW is displayed on screen.

5-71
 Operation Manual

The EFW measurements taken and the order in which they are measured are as follows:
Reference Measure Item (by Order)

Campbell AC

Hadlock BPDgAC

Hadlock1 ACgFL

Hadlock2 BPDgACgFL

Hadlock3 ACgFLgHC

Hadlock4 BPD, HCgACgFL

Hansmann BPDgTTD

Merz BPDgAC

Osaka BPDgFTAgFL

Shepard BPDgAC

Shinozuka1 BPDgACgFL

Shinozuka2 BPDgAPTD, TTDgSL

Shinozuka3 BPDgAPTD, TTDgFL

Ferrero ACgFL

Higginbottom AC

Thurnau BPDgAC

Warsof BPDgAC

Weiner1 ACgHC

Weiner2 ACgFLg HC

Woo BPDgACgFL

Changing Measurement Sequence

Tips!
To change the measurement sequence, go to Utility > MeasureSetup > OB > Tables > EFW
Sequential Measurement.

5-72
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Gynecology Calculations

NOTE:
XX
For information on basic measurement methods, see ‘Basic Measurements’ and ‘Common
Measurement Methods’.
XX
For references on measurement items, see the Reference Manual - Part 2.

Before Taking GYN Measurements

Enter the information required for GYN diagnosis on the Patient Information screen. Basic information
for gynecology includes Gravida, Para, Aborta, Ovul.Date. Day of Cycle, and Ectopic.

Measurement Menu
The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement. Measured items are
automatically recorded in a report.

[Figure 5.15 GYN Measurement Menu]

5-73
 Operation Manual

Item Sub-Item Mode Method Unit

Calculation after Distance
Uterus All All ml
Measurement
Uterus L All Distance cm, mm
Uterus H All Distance cm, mm
Uterus
Uterus W All Distance cm, mm
Cervix All All Measurement of Volume ml
Cervix L All Distance cm, mm
Endo. Thick All Distance cm, mm
L All Distance cm, mm
Rt. Ovary
Lt. Ovary Calculation after Distance
All All ml
Measurement
Auto Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace
Limited Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace
Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Rt. Uterine A
Lt. Uterine A Calculation after Area
%StA All %
Measurement
Calculation after Distance
%StD All %
Measurement
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm

Most of the gynecology measurements are distance measurements and volume measurements based
on the distance measurement results. If multiple images, such as long axis images and transverse axis
images are needed, press the Freeze button to switch to Scan Mode and obtain images from another
perspective.

5-74
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Abdomen Calculations
The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement. Measured items are
automatically recorded in a report.

NOTE:
XX
It is convenient to calculate each measurement value on the Spectral Doppler image.
XX
For information on basic measurement methods, see ‘Basic Measurements’ and ‘Common
Measurement Methods’.

Abdomen Measurement Menu

[Figure 5.16 Abdomen Measurement Menu]

Item Sub-Item Mode Method Unit

Calculation after Distance
All All ml
Liver Measurement
Spleen L All Distance cm, mm
Rt. Kidney
Lt. Kidney H All Distance cm, mm
W All Distance cm, mm
CBD All Distance cm, mm
Wall All Distance cm, mm
Calculation after Distance
All All ml
GB Measurement
L All Distance cm, mm
H All Distance cm, mm
W All Distance cm, mm

5-75
 Operation Manual

Item Sub-Item Mode Method Unit

Head All Distance cm, mm
Body All Distance cm, mm
Pancreas
Tail All Distance cm, mm
Duct All Distance cm, mm
Stomach Wall All Distance cm, mm
Bowel Small Bowel Wall All Distance cm, mm
Large Bowel Wall All Distance cm, mm

5-76
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Abd. Vascular Measurement Menu

[Figure 5.17 Abd. Vascular Measurement Menu]

Item Sub-Item Mode Method Unit

Auto Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace
Limited Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace
Prox / Mid / Distal
Aorta Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace
Celiac A
PSV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Splenic A
C / R / L Hepatic A EDV PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
Prox / Mid / Distal
Calculation after Area
SMA %StA All %
Measurement
IMA
Renal A Calculation after Distance
%StD All %
Arcuate A Measurement
Iliac A
Vesl. Area All Area cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist All Distance cm, mm
Auto Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace
Prox / Mid / Distal IVC Limited Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace
Renal V
Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace
R / M / L Portal V
R / M / L Hepatic V Vmax PW Velocity cm/s, m/s
SMV
Dur T PW Time ms
IMV
Splenic V Vesl. Area All Area cm , mm2
2

Vesl. Dist. All Distance cm, mm

HR - M, PW Heart Rate bpm

5-77
 Operation Manual

Report
Press the Report button on the control panel. The Ultrasound Measure Report screen will appear.
Measurement results are arranged by application and displayed on the screen in the form of a report.

NOTE:
XXReports for applications in which no measurements have been made will not be shown.
If the Report button is pressed on the control panel when measuring StressEcho, a StressEcho report
XX
will appear.

[Figure 5.18 The Report Screen]

[Figure 5.19 The Report - Softmenu]

5-78
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Viewing Report
The ‘Current Page’ and ‘Current Zoom’ values will be displayed at the bottom of the Ultrasound Measure Report
screen. ‘Current Page’ shows the current page number/total pages, whereas the ‘Current Zoom’ shows the
report screen zooming information.

■■ Select report type

Select a report type using the combo box in the screen. Report type can only be changed if stress echo
or strain measurement data is available.

■■ Scroll
Move a report page up or down by rotating dial-button [2] to the left or right. The location of the
current page is displayed in ‘Current Page’ at the bottom of the screen.

Moving the report page

Tips!
The report page can be moved using the scroll bar on the right side of the screen.

■■ Zoom/Fit

Zoom: Turn dial-button [3] to zoom the report page in/out. The current zoom ratio will be
XX
displayed as “Current Zoom” at the bottom of the screen.

Fit: Sets the report page display method. Turn dial-button [3] and select one of the following
XX
three options. The selected method will be displayed as “Current Zoom” at the bottom of the
screen.

Fit Width: The screen will be adjusted to the width of the report.

Fit Height: The screen will be adjusted to the height of the report.

Fit Dual Page: Shows two pages of the report content on the screen.

Report For Echo Paper

„„
Sets preview of the output type report.

Video Out Mode

„„
Sets whether the report screen size will be set to 1024*768 or not.

5-79
 Operation Manual

Editing Report
From the soft menu, set [1] Mode to Edit, and then press the dial button. The report edit screen appears. You
can edit measurement results or change the way that measurements are displayed.
Click OK to save the changes and close the edit screen. Click Cancel to close the edit screen without saving
the changes. Click Next App on the screen to edit reports for other diagnosis items.

[Figure 5.20 Report Editing

Modify Measurements
Use the trackball, the Set button and the alphanumeric keyboard on the control panel to modify
measurements. The values are displayed in grey, indicating that they are modified.

Measurement Display Method

The product allows you to measure one measurement item several times. However, only the first three
measurement results are saved in a report.
When taking the same item more than once, measurements can be displayed in four ways as below: On
the edit report screen, you can specify or change the measurement display method.

■■ Avg.
Obtain the average of measurements and display it on the screen.

5-80
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

■■ Last
Display the last measurements on the screen.

■■ Max
Display the largest value of the measurements on the screen.

■■ Min
Display the smallest value of the measurements on the screen.

5-81
 Operation Manual

Adding Comment
Press Comment in the left menu of the report editing screen. A screen for the entry of opinions or findings
will appear.
When OK is clicked on the screen, the content is saved and the edit screen ends. If you wish to end the edit
screen without saving changes, click Cancel on the screen. Click Next App on the screen to edit reports for
other diagnosis items.

[Figure 5.21 Comment]

Printing Report
Press the Print button on the control panel. The report is printed out by a connected printer.

NOTE: You can change the settings for printing measurement reports in Setup > Peripherals >
Print Setup > Measure Printer. For more information, refer to “Peripherals Setup” in Chapter 7.
“Utilities”.

5-82
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Transfer Report
Press Data Transfer on the Ultrasound Measure Report screen. Sends a report using the RS232C cable
connected to the system.
To use the Transfer function,
1. Connect a RS232C cable to the system.

2. Select “Open Line Transfer” from the Setup > Peripherals > Peripherals > COM menu.

NOTE: Select the Measure Setup > General > Data Transfer > Serial Transfer menu to set the
type of data to transfer. For more details, refer to Chapter 7. “Utilities”.

5-83
 Operation Manual

Export Report
Press Export on the Ultrasound Measure Report screen. The Export window will appear, allowing you to save
the report in external storage media.
When the Export window appears, specify the directory, drive, file name, and file format. Click OK on the
screen to save the report. Or, click Cancel to cancel.

[Figure 5.22 Export]

Saving a file in PDF or JPEG format

Tips!
Press the Acquire button on the control panel to save the report in the USB flash memory drive with
the predefined format. If more than two USB flash memory devices are connected, the drive with
higher alphabetical order will be used.

5-84
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Change Template
Press the Softmenu dial-button [4] Change Template on the control panel. Or, press Change Template on
the Ultrasound Measure Report screen.

You can change various options regarding report composition. The report preview will appear on the upper
side of the screen. Click Save to save the current settings. Click Close to cancel settings.

[Figure 5.23 Change Template]

Layout

■■ General
Sets the default report format.
Full: Displays all measurement values.
▶▶
Short: Displays the final result value (Avg., GA, Pctl) of the measured values.
▶▶
2 Columns: Measurement items will be displayed in 2 columns.
▶▶

5-85
 Operation Manual

Report
■■ Patient Info.
Sets the page scope of the patient information.
All pages: Shows all pages of the patient information.
XX

Only 1st Page: Only the first page of the patient information will be displayed.
XX

■■ Header 1, Header 2
Sets the content that will be displayed on the report header.

■■ Footer
Sets the content that will be displayed on the report footer.

■■ Title
User defined title: You can input your preferred title.
▶▶
Institution: Use the title defined in Setup > General > Title > Institute.
▶▶

■■ Logo
Sets whether the logo will be displayed on the upper side of the page or not.

■■ Change Logo
Press the button to display the logo window. You can change the logo by selecting an image file (BMP
or JPEG) saved in the USB flash memory or CD-ROM.

NOTE: If the file name contains characters that are not supported by this product, the file name may
not appear appropriately.

■■ Show Date In Footer

Shows the printed date in the report footer.

5-86
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Print
■■ Range
All Page: Default setting. Prints all pages.
▶▶
Current Page: Prints the currently displayed page only.
▶▶

■■ Color
Black and White: Default setting. Prints in black on a white background.
▶▶
Same as Preview: Prints in color as shown in the preview.
▶▶

NOTE: A warning message will appear if the printer cannot print the report.

5-87
 Operation Manual

Insert Image
Press [5] Insert Images in the soft menu. The Images window will appear. These images can be inserted into
the report.

[Figure 5.24 Insert Image]

1. Select an image from the Image List. The selected image will be displayed on the View.
2. Input the description in the Description textbox. Select the diagnosis subject using the combo box and input
the text. Click the Add button. Then the entered description will be displayed at the bottom of the screen.
If you select an image from the Selected Images, the Modify button will be enabled and you can modify
▶▶
the description.

3. Click the OK button to save the data. The selected image will be displayed on the report screen.

Store SR
Click the Store SR button on the Ultrasound Measure Report screen to save the report to the specified DICOM
server.

5-88
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Stress Echo Report

If the Report button is pressed on the control panel when measuring StressEcho, a StressEcho report will
appear.

XX
The StressEcho report cannot be edited.
NOTE XX
Other usage methods are the same as for normal reports.
XX
For more information on Stress Echo, refer to Chapter 7. ‘Utilities’.

[Figure 5.25 Stress Echo Report]

5-89
 Operation Manual

Graph

NOTE: The graph function can be used only with OB reports.

From the soft menu, set [1] Mode to Graph, and then press the dial button. The Graph screen will appear.
You can review the graph and history. The list of graphs appears on the left side of the screen.

To return to the report screen, select Report on the screen. Alternatively, press the soft menu’s dial-button
[6] Exit.

The list of measured items appears on the left side of the screen. If you select an item, a graph for the
selected item will appear on the screen.

NOTE:
XX
To display a graph, the LMP or Estab. Due Date should be saved under Patient Information, and
the GA table and Fetal Growth table should be enabled.
XX
A graph is created based on the patient ID, LMP and measurement date.

[Figure 5.26 Graph]

5-90
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Select a Graph
„„
Select a graph from the list. The graph will be shown on the screen. Use the Trackball and the Set
button to select a check box from the list. The currently selected graph is shown in yellow in the
report page list.
Click Select All in the list to select all the graphs.

Graph Layout
„„
If the 2 x 2 checkbox is checked, 4 graphs will be displayed on the screen.
Specify the measurements that you wish to review the graphs for by selecting the appropriate
checkboxes.

Pctl. Criteria (Percentile Criteria)

„„
Select from LMP, EstabDD and AUA, GA View.

GA by LMP: The GA is calculated based on the maternal LMP.

XX

Estab. Due Date: The GA is calculated based on the Estab. Due Date under Patient Information.
XX

AUA (Average US GA): The GA is calculated using the average values of several ultrasound
XX
measurements.

History
„„
The current and past measurements for a fetus are displayed in a concise format.

Print Checked Graph

„„
Set the graph layout when you wish to print the reports.

NOTE: Only the graphs selected from the list will be printed.

Print Current Graph: Only the selected graph is printed.

XX

Print Checked Graph (1 x 1): The selected graph is printed in a 1 x 1 format.

XX

Print Checked Graph (3 x 2): The selected graph is printed in a 3 x 2 format.

XX

5-91
 Operation Manual

History

NOTE: The history function can only be used with OB reports.

Click History on the graph screen. The past and present measurement values for the fetus are displayed
in a table format.

[Figure 5.27 History]

5-92
 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations

Standard Deviation & Percentile

Tips!
Among the OB information, the Growth table and the typical fetal distribution for the same number
of weeks are used to determine the following information:
XX
The normal distribution curve.
XX
The measurements for an actual fetus or a position in EFW distribution.
XX
Whether a distribution point is within the normal range.
The number of weeks referenced for the Growth table can be set to LMP, Estab. Due Date, or
Average US GA, under Pctl. Criteria. The typical setting is LMP.
When the LMP is not known or uncertain, or when the difference between the LMP and the
Average US GA is substantial, care must be taken, as selecting different Pctl.Criteria can result in a
significant difference.
The distribution of the number of weeks in the Growth table for the selected reference is a normal
distribution. It is laterally symmetrical around 50% (the average), and it shows the distance from the
average as a deviation. The deviation can be represented by Standard Deviation (SD) or Percentile.

[Figure 5.28 The distribution of the Growth Table for the selected
number of weeks (m:Average, s:Standard Deviation)]

5-93
 Operation Manual

When represented by SD, a point near the average indicates a value closer to ±0 SD and a point
away from the average indicates a value closer to the maximum or minimum value. The greater
part of the range falls within ±3 SD, with ±1 SD representing 68.3% of the entire range. Thus it can
be seen that most fetal measurements are tightly clustered around the average value.
The Percentile represents a point in distribution from between 0 and 100 inclusive. Therefore, the
average point is represented as 50 Percentile.
As shown in the figure, the average point corresponds to 0 SD (that is, 50th Percentile). If a point
is in the range between -1 SD and +1 SD, it falls within the central 68.3% of the entire range. This
means that the point falls within the range between 16 and 84.
Further, if a point is in the range between -2 SD and +2 SD, it falls within the central 95.5% of the
entire range. Thus, the point falls in the range between 3 and 97.
The SD and Percentile can be used interchangeably. Percentile can be used when a fetal
measurement ranking is desired, and SD can be used when the distance between actual fetal
measurements and the average measurement is sought.
While the range of Growth Table references that are primarily used with OB measurement data
varies depending on the user, the typical range accepted by most users is as below:
1) When references are created based on SD:
−− 2.0 SD - +2.0 SD (when converted to Percentile:2.28 Percentile - 97.72 Percentile)
−− 1.5 SD - +1.5 SD (when converted to Percentile:6.68 Percentile - 93.32 Percentile)
−− 1.0 SD - +1.0 SD (when converted to Percentile:15.87 Percentile - 84.13 Percentile)
2) When references are created based on Percentile:
−− 2.5 Percentile - 97.5 Percentile (when converted to SD:-1.96 SD - 1.96 SD)
−− 5.0 Percentile - 95.0 Percentile (when converted to SD:-1.645 SD - 1.645 SD)
−− 10.0 Percentile - 90.0 Percentile (when converted to SD:-1.288 SD - 1.288 SD)

Closing Report
Press the Report button again or the [6] Exit dial-button on the softmenu.
Or press the Exit button on the control panel.

5-94
Chapter 6
Image Management

‹‹CINE / LOOP.......................................................6-3

‹‹Annotating Images..........................................6-6
Text.................................................................................................6-6
Body Marker ..............................................................................6-9
Indicator ....................................................................................6-11

‹‹Saving, Playing and Transferring

Images............................................................. 6-13
Saving Images .........................................................................6-13
Playing Images........................................................................6-14
Transferring Images ..............................................................6-15

‹‹Printing and Recording Images .................. 6-16

Printing Images.......................................................................6-16
Recording Images .................................................................6-16

‹‹SONOVIEW..................................................... 6-17
Using Tips..................................................................................6-19
Exam Mode...............................................................................6-20
Compare Mode.......................................................................6-22
Exam Tool..................................................................................6-24
 Chapter 6 Image Management

CINE / LOOP
Images are automatically saved in the memory during scanning. The saved images can be useful when a pa-
tient is diagnosed and reviewed.
The saved images can be in CINE or LOOP depending on the diagnosis mode.

▶ CINE: Images that are saved in all modes other than M Mode and Spectral Mode.

▶ LOOP: Images that are saved in M Mode and Spectral Mode.

[Figure 6.1 CINE / LOOP]

Starting and Finishing Image Review

During scanning, press the Freeze button on the control panel. The scanning is stopped and the system
switches to the image review mode screen.
Press the Freeze button again to return to the scan mode.

6-3
 Operation Manual

How to Review Images

Move the cursor in the Cine or Loop bar in the user information area to review an image. You can search
through saved images by moving the cursor with the trackball. Next to the bar, the total number of saved
images and the number of the current image being reviewed are shown.

̰̰ Select CINE / LOOP

Select an image for playback by pressing the Set button. This option appears only when both CINE and
LOOP are available, as in M Mode or Spectral Doppler Mode. You can select an image to play in CINE
and LOOP by pressing this button. The selection is displayed in the left side of the user information area.

The softmenu menu is changed when images are reviewed.

[Figure 6.2 CINE / LOOP - Softmenu]

̰̰ Quant. Type
Turn the soft menu dial-button [1] and select a Quantification Type. Select one of Strain, Auto EF, or
TMAD. For more details, refer to Chapter 7. "Utility” – “Strain Image”.

̰̰ Quantification
Press the soft menu dial-button [1] to start the Strain Image function. For more details, refer to Chapter 7.
"Utility” – “Strain Image”.

̰̰ Auto Run
Turn the [2] dial-button on the softmenu. You can adjust the automatic playback speed for CINE or
LOOP by rotating the dial-button. The allowable range for adjustment is 10-200% in increments/decre-
ments of 10%.

̰̰ Run / Stop
Press the [2] dial-button on the softmenu. You can stop or resume playback of an image by pressing the
dial-button.

6-4
 Chapter 6 Image Management

̰̰ First Pos
Use the [4] dial-button on the softmenu. You can specify the first frame in the range in which CINE or
LOOP will be saved. After specifying the position of the first frame by rotating the dial-button or using
the trackball, press the dial-button to save it.

̰̰ Last Pos
Use the [5] dial-button on the softmenu. You can specify the last frame in the range in which CINE or
LOOP will be saved. After specifying the position of the last frame by rotating the dial-button or using
the trackball, press the dial-button to save it.

̰̰ Trim First Pos

Use dial button [4] on the soft menu. Set the first frame of the range for saving when saving Cine or
Loop. Set a location for the first frame using the trackball and press the dial button to save it.

̰̰ Trim Last Pos

Use dial button [5] on the soft menu. Set the last frame of the range for saving when saving Cine or
Loop. Set a location for the last frame using the trackball and press the dial button to save it.

̰̰ CINE Save
Use the [6] dial-button on the softmenu. This has the same function as when the Acquire button on the
control is pressed. You can save the specified image area by pressing the dial-button.
The saved image appears in the thumbnail list on the screen, and can be reloaded or replayed in scan
mode or SONOVIEW.

Reviewing Images in Multi-Image Mode

Only images in an active area can be reviewed. To review images in another area, change the active area
by using the F7 key, Select Active Window, on the keyboard. Alternatively, after pressing Pointer on the
control panel, place the cursor in the area to activate and press the Set button on the control panel.

6-5
 Operation Manual

Annotating Images

Text
You can enter comments or text over an image. This function can be useful when the diagnosis area is differ-
entiated or displayed.

Starting Text Mode

Press the F3 key, Text, on the keyboard. Alternatively, press the soft menu’s dial-button [5] Document.
The system will switch to text mode.

NOTE: When Quick Text is enabled, the system switches to text mode immediately after the
keyboard is pressed.

[Figure 6.3 Text Mode]

6-6
 Chapter 6 Image Management

Typing Text
Use the keyboard. Use the Document menu or the F3, Text, on the keyboard to enter text automatically.
You can move the cursor by using the trackball or the arrow keys on the keyboard.

Text Mode in Soft Menu

[Figure 6.4 Text Mode in Soft Menu]

̰̰ Font Size
Set a font between 10 and 30 by rotating dial button [1] beneath the soft menu.

̰̰ Default size
The font changes to the default size (11) when dial button [1] beneath the soft menu is pressed.

̰̰ Home Position
Select Load or Set by rotating dial button [2] beneath the soft menu.

̰̰ Load / Set
Perform the Home Position function by pressing dial button [2] beneath the soft menu. When Load is
selected and the dial button is pressed, the default location appears. When Set is selected and the dial
button is pressed, the default location for the cursor is reset.

̰̰ Text
Select a Text option between Text 1 and Text 10 by rotating dial button [3] beneath the soft menu.

̰̰ Input
Input the selected text by pressing dial button [3] beneath the soft menu.

̰̰ Edit
Press the [4] dial-button on the softmenu to display the Text Edit window. Edit Text 1 to 10 using the
keyboard. Click OK to complete editing. Click Cancel to cancel.

6-7
 Operation Manual

[Figure 6.5 Text Edit]

Autotext
This function allows you to enter text automatically by using an abbreviation. In this way, you can enter
text easily and quickly. When Autotext is enabled, the autotext list appears on the screen.

[Figure 6.6 The Autotext List]

NOTE: Select Setup > Utility > Autotext Setup > Autotext.

Deleting Text
Press the Clear button on the control panel. All the text entered on the screen will be deleted.

Exiting Text Mode

Press the F3 key again or dial-button [6] on the soft menu. Or you may press the Exit button on the
control panel.

6-8
 Chapter 6 Image Management

Body Marker
You can place a Body Marker over an image. This function can be useful when the diagnosis area is differenti-
ated or displayed.

Starting Body Marker Mode

Press the F5 key, Body Marker, on the keyboard. The system will switch to Body Marker mode and Body
Markers will appear in the user information area.

NOTE: If Setup > Display > Freeze Action is set to Body Marker and the Freeze button is clicked,
the mode immediately switches to Body Marker mode.

[Figure 6.7 Body Marker Mode]

6-9
 Operation Manual

[Figure 6.8 Body Marker - Softmenu]

Entering Body Marker

1. When the F5 key, Body Marker, is pressed, body markers appear in the Thumbnail area.
▶ The types of Body Marker shown in the softmenu Menu vary with the diagnosis mode.
▶ A maximum of five body markers are displayed on the screen at any one time. When there are
more Body Markers than this, rotate the [1] Page dial-button on the softmenu to display other
pages.
2. Press the softmenu button for the Body Marker that you want. The Body Marker will appear in the im-
age.
3. Position the probe cursor on the Body Marker using the trackball.
4. Use the Angle dial on the control panel to adjust the angle of the probe cursor.
▶ To change the angle degree, use the [6] Angle Degree dial-button on the softmenu. Select 15 or
45.
5. Press the Set button on the control panel to finish.

Changing Body Marker Position

1. Press the Set button on the control panel.
2. Move the Body Marker to a desired position by using the trackball.
3. Press the Set button on the control panel again to confirm the new position.

Deleting Body Marker

Press the Clear button on the control panel.

Exiting Body Marker Mode

Press the F5 key again or dial-button [6] on the soft menu. Or you may press the Exit button on the
control panel.

6-10
 Chapter 6 Image Management

Indicator
You can place an Indicator over an image. This function can be useful when the diagnosis area is differenti-
ated or displayed. Up to 50 indicators can be entered.

[Figure 6.9 Indicator Mode]

[Figure 6.10 Indicator Mode - Softmenu]

Starting Indicator Mode

Press the F4 key, Indicator, on the keyboard. Alternatively, press the soft menu’s dial button [1] Indicator.
The system will switch to the Indicator input mode.

6-11
 Operation Manual

Entering Indicator
1. Press the F4 key, Indicator, on the keyboard an Indicator will appear on the screen.
2. Move the Indicator to a desired position by using the trackball.
3. Adjust the Indicator direction by using the Angle dial on the control panel.
4. Press the Set button on the control panel to finish.

Deleting Indicator
When you press the Clear button on the control panel, all indicators entered on the screen are cleared.
If you want to delete only the indicator that you entered last, press the [1] Undo dial-button on the soft
menu.

Exiting Indicator Mode

Press the F4 key again or dial-button [6] Exit on the softmenu. Or you may press the Exit button on the
control panel.

6-12
 Chapter 6 Image Management

Saving, Playing and Transferring Images

Saving Images
WARNING: You must enter the patient ID because all images are saved according to patient ID.
Failure to enter a patient ID may result in a loss of and/or critical error(s) in previously saved images.

The saved images are displayed on the thumbnail area.

Saving Still Images

Press the Freeze button and then press the Acquire button on the control panel. If the patient’s
information is not entered, the Patient Information screen will appear. The saved images can be edited and
managed with SONOVIEW.

Saving Multi Frame Images

In Dual/Quad Mode, CINE in the active area is saved only. Depending on the frozen mode, multi-frame im-
ages can be saved in two ways:
▶ When in scan mode, press the Acquire button on the control panel. Images are saved according to
the settings specified under Setup > General > Acquisition Setting. If the patient's information is
not entered, it is not saved. For information on the settings, please refer to Chapter 7 ‘Utilities’
▶ When frozen mode, use the trackball or rotate the [4] and [5] dial-button on the softmenu to specify
the range of images to save, and then press the [6] dial-button on the softmenu to save the Cine im-
age. If the patient’s information is not entered, the Patient Information screen will appear.

6-13
 Operation Manual

Playing Images
The saved images can be played in SONOVIEW or in a diagnosis mode.

Playing Images in SONOVIEW

NOTE: Please refer to “SONOVIEW” in this chapter.

Playing Images in Diagnosis Mode

Use the Pointer button on the control panel. Note that this function is available only when there are im-
ages saved in the thumbnail list.
1. Press the Pointer button and the cursor will appear on the screen.
2. Select an image on the thumbnail area to play on the screen. The selected image is played on the im-
age area.
In Multi Mode, you can specify a location and play an image.

6-14
 Chapter 6 Image Management

Transferring Images
EKO 7 allows you to transfer images to the PACS system supporting DICOM. You can transfer all saved images
automatically, or select a desired image and transfer it manually. For information on the DICOM server set-
tings and DICOM operations, please refer to “Setting DICOM” in Chapter 7 “Utilities.”

Transferring Images in Diagnosis Mode

You can transfer images automatically. Go to Setup > DICOM and transfer images based on the transfer
protocol for the storage server. For more information, please refer to “Setting DICOM” in Chapter 7 “Utilities.”

Transferring Images from SONOVIEW

You can transfer images manually in the following two ways:

̰̰ Sending Exam
Send all images for an exam.
1. Select an exam in the Exam List
2. Press the Send button at the bottom of the screen. All images for the selected exam will be sent.

̰̰ Sending Selected Images

Select a desired image from among the images for an exam and send it out.
1. View an exam in the SONOVIEW screen.
2. Select an image.
3. Press the Send icon at the bottom of the screen. The selected images will be sent.

6-15
 Operation Manual

Printing and Recording Images

Printing Images
Press the Print button on the control panel. Images are printed via an echo printer. For information on how
to setup a printer, please refer to Chapter 7 “Utilities.”

Recording Images
NOTE:
XX
Please make sure that a VCR is properly connected to the system.
XX
Please use the system to remote control of VCR.

For Regular VCR

Record images by using the [9] VCR on the keyboard.

For Panasonic MD 835, SONY DVO-1000MD, JVC BD-X201 or Mitsubishi

MD3000
A VCR Counter is displayed on the screen. To connect these VCR via a serial port, specify the VCR Type and
Source under the Peripheral tab in the Setting window.
Press the Record button on the control panel to record images. Alternatively, press the Record button on
the VCR. To stop the VCR, press the Record button on the control panel.

6-16
 Chapter 6 Image Management

SONOVIEW
SONOVIEW is an integrated image management program in EKO 7. It allows you to save, view and delete im-
ages, and export data to a standard PC.
The image file type used in this product is based on DICOM, an international standard specification. As a re-
sult, PACS can be implemented without any additional cost, and it’s easy to exchange image data with other
hospitals or equipment. Furthermore, for enhanced data compatibility, it supports the bitmap file format,
which is most commonly used in standard PCs.

Starting SONOVIEW
Press the Review button on the control panel. The system will switch to the SONOVIEW screen.
If there are the saved images available for the current exam, the information and saved images for the
exam appear when SONOVIEW starts.

WARNING: Make sure to register a patient before saving images or using SONOVIEW.
All diagnosis information in the product is saved and managed for each patient ID. As a result,
saving images without entering a patient ID may result in a loss of and/or critical error(s) in
previously saved image.

SONOVIEW Screen
The SONOVIEW screen consists of the following items:

̰̰ Mode Selection Buttons : Either Exam Mode or Compare Mode can be selected. The selected
button is highlighted with yellow frames.

̰̰ Exam List : This shows patient ID, exam list and list management buttons, etc. The selected exam is
highlighted with yellow frames, and the ID of the exam currently being used is underlined. The number
in parentheses indicates the number of images saved in the corresponding exam. In Compare Mode,
saved images are shown in thumbnails.

The following list management buttons are available:

▶ Review Exam: Review the exams that were saved 24 hours or more before the current system time.

▶ Continue Exam: Review the exams that were saved within 24 hours of the current system time.

6-17
 Operation Manual

▶ Current Exam: Review the current exam by entering its ID.

▶ Close All: Close all exams in the exam list.

▶ Close: Close the selected exam(s).

Tip! Review Mode

Tips!
If you press Review Exam, the first four (or fewer) images will be displayed on the Quad mode
screen automatically. The selected images will be highlighted with green borders in the Thumbnail
list. The following section describes how to use the Review mode.
Playing images
XX
If you change the First Pos or Last Pos of the Cine images, Sync Play will be played at the
−−
modified position.
−−
For Cine Save, the images will be played to fit into modified Trim.
−−
When playing the images after selecting them from the Thumbnail list, Sync Play will be
modified by including the selected image.
Adjusting Sync Play
XX
Among four images that are automatically played, Sync Play of the Cine images can be adjusted
using soft menu [3] Play Back dial-button.
−−
Free: Played back freely without adjusting Sync.
−−
Short: Cines will be played in synchronization with the shortest frame.
−−
Long: Cines will be played in synchronization with the longest frame.
−−
End to End: Each Cine image will be played and stopped at the same time.
Changing images to play
XX
Double click the image from the Thumbnail list. Four images including the selected image will be
played.
Zooming in an image
XX
If you double click an image played in the Quad mode, it will be played in full.
Deleting an image
XX
Select an image from the Thumbnail list. The selected image will be displayed in a yellow
borderline. Press the Del key to delete the selected image.

̰̰ Exam Tools: Images included in exams can be managed with these tools that are available in icon
form. The icon name is shown as a tool tip when the cursor is placed over it. The selected icon is shown
in yellow, and it is deselected when it is pressed once more. For more information, please refer to “Exam
Tools” in this chapter.

6-18
 Chapter 6 Image Management

Using Tips
The following descriptions relate to image manipulation.

Viewing Images in Full Screen Mode

Place the cursor on an image and press the Set button twice. The image will be displayed in full screen
mode.

Selecting Multiple Images

While holding the Ctrl key, use the trackball and the Set button to select images. The selected images will
be highlighted in yellow.

Post Processing
Press the button in the lower left corner of an image. The menu for post-processing will be dis-
played. Use this menu to adjust the image for diagnosis. The changes made during post-processing are
not saved to the image.

NOTE: Cine playback is only available in a layout of 2 x 2 or less.

Reviewing Cine
If the saved image is Cine, the buttons and scroll bar for playback and seek are shown at the bottom of the
screen. The Play, Pause and Stop buttons and the scroll bar can be used to search through Cine.

[Figure 6.11 Cine Scroll Bar]

NOTE: Cine playback is only available in a layout of 2 x 2 or less.

6-19
 Operation Manual

Exam Mode
Click Exam. The system will switch to Exam Mode, in which the current or saved exams can be reviewed.

[Figure 6.12 Exam Mode]

[Figure 6.13 Exam Mode - Softmenu]0

The Exam Mode Screen

Exams for each patient ID are displayed by date in a tree in the left side of the screen. The numbers in pa-
rentheses represent the numbers of the saved images. To show or hide exams, use the trackball and the
Set button to select a desired ID.

6-20
 Chapter 6 Image Management

Searching for Exam

1. Click the Exam Search icon. The Exam List screen will be displayed.
2. Select the desired exam and then click Review. The system will switch to the SONOVIEW screen,
showing the selected exam.

Selecting Exam
Use the trackball and the Set button to select the desired exam from the list in the left hand side of the
screen. The selected exam will be highlighted in yellow in the list, and the images saved in it will be dis-
played on the screen.

̰̰ Review Current Exam

Click Current Exam. The current exam and its images will be displayed on the screen. This button is
enabled only when a patient ID is provided.

̰̰ Review Exams Saved within 24 Hours

Click Continue Exam. Exams conducted during the last 24 hours and their images will be displayed on
the screen. The date on which each exam was conducted for the first time (Exam Resumed) will also be
shown in the feedback area.
In the retrieved exam screen, a variety of tasks such as taking measurements, typing text, or placing
BodyMarkers and indicators can be performed.

̰̰ Review Exams Saved more than 24 Hours previously

Click Review Exam. Exams conducted more than 24 hours previously and their images will be dis-
played on the screen. Other instructions are as for ‘Continue Exam.’

̰̰ Finish Continue Exam

Press the End Exam button on the control panel.

Finishing Exam Review

Click Close. Or click Close All to close all exams in the list.

6-21
 Operation Manual

Image Scroll
The image of the previous or next page is displayed on the screen. Use the [2] Image Scroll dial-button
on the softmenu. Rotating the dial-button to the left displays the previous page image and rotating it to
the right displays the next page image.
However, this button may not be used when the number of exams saved is less than the number of
images that appear in a page under the current layout.

Compare Mode
Click Compare. The system will switch to Compare Mode, in which images can be selected from the thumb-
nail list and reviewed.

[Figure 6.14 Compare Mode]

[Figure 6.15 Compare Mode - Softmenu]

6-22
 Chapter 6 Image Management

The Compare Mode Screen

As in Exam Mode, exams for each ID appear on the screen and images for the selected exam are displayed
in a thumbnail format.

Searching for Exam

As in Exam Mode, click the Exam Search icon.

Selecting Images
Use the trackball and the Set button to select image(s) from the thumbnail list. The selected images will
be highlighted in yellow in the list. Specify a location on the screen to display the selected images. The im-
ages will be displayed at the specified location.

NOTE: Only scan data can be retrieved into the image area.

Thumb Scroll
The image of the previous or next page is displayed on the thumbnail list. Use the [3] Thumb Scroll dial-
button on the softmenu. Rotating the dial-button to the left displays the previous page image and rotat-
ing it to the right displays the next page image.

6-23
 Operation Manual

Exam Tool
Icons and soft menu items on the screen can be used to perform a variety of tasks for image review and man-
agement. Placing the cursor near each icon shows the icon name as a tool tip.

A: Layout I: Export Image

B: Exam Search J: Send E-mail
C: Distance Caliper K: Delete Image
D: Ellipse Caliper L: Select All Images
E: Text Annotate M: Deselect All Images
F: Print Image N: Device
G: Send Image to DICOM Storage O: Exit
H: Send Image to DICOM Print

[Figure 6.16 Exam Tools]

Layout
Use the [1] dial-button on the softmenu or Layout icon to adjust the number of images that can be dis-
played on the screen.
The digits shown under the Layout field indicate the number of row(s) and column(s) of image(s) that will
be displayed on the screen. These settings can be changed to configure a variety of layouts. Up to 16 im-
ages (4 x 4) can be compared at a time.

6-24
 Chapter 6 Image Management

Exam Search
Click the Exam Search icon. The Exam List screen will be displayed.

[Figure 6.17 Exam Search]

At the top of the Exam List screen, search criteria including ID can be specified and the search results can
be viewed. The search results are displayed in a list on the screen.
The list provides various information including Exam Date, Images, Measure, SR (Structured Report), SE
(Stress Echo), SC (Storage Commit) and lock status as well as Patient ID, Name, Age, Gender. Furthermore,
pressing items such as Patient ID and Name sorts the entries into the alphabetical or numerical order of
the selected criteria.
Exams can be selected from the list, and various tasks such as review, deletion or transfer can be per-
formed. For more information, please refer to “Printing Images,” and “Transferring via DICOM” in the later
part of this chapter. Select the Multi Select checkbox to select more than one exam.
Select an exam and Press Review to activate scan mode. Images associated with the selected exam are
shown on the screen. The date when the exam was first performed also appears in the feedback area. In
the loaded exam screen, you can make measurements and enter text, a Bodymarker, or an indicator.
Select an exam and press SONOVIEW to bring up the SonoView screen. Images associated with the
selected exam are shown on the screen.

6-25
 Operation Manual

Distance Measurement
Click the Distance Caliper icon to measure the distance between two points on an image. Measurement
results are not saved.
1. Place the cursor over an image and press the Set button. The image will be displayed in its original
size.
2. Measure the distance between two points. For more information on measuring distance, please refer
to “Basic Measurements” in Chapter 5 ‘Measurements and Calculations.’
3. To finish measurement press the dial-button [6] Exit beneath the soft menu. Or press the Exit button
on the control panel.

Circumference and Area Measurement

Click the Ellipse Caliper icon to measure the circumference and area of the selected area on an image.
Measurement results are not saved.
1. Place the cursor over an image and press the Set button. The image will be displayed in its original
size.
2. Measure the circumference or area of the selected area. For more information on measuring distance,
please refer to “Basic Measurements” in Chapter 5 ‘Measurements and Calculations.’
3. To finish measurement press the dial-button [6] Exit beneath the soft menu. Or press the Exit button
on the control panel.

Typing Text
Click the Text Annotate icon. Type the desired text in the selected image.
1. After placing the mouse cursor on the desired image, press the Set button to display the image in its
original size.
2. Place the cursor on the desired area and type text.
▶ To Changes the font color or size, use [4] Font Color or [5] Font Size in the soft menu.
3. Press the Set button to confirm the text. To exit Annotation Mode, press the dial-button [6] Exit
beneath the soft menu. Or press the Exit button on the control panel.

6-26
 Chapter 6 Image Management

Printing Images
1. Click the Print Image icon. The Image Print window will be displayed.
2. Click the Setup and Comment tabs, and then specify the required settings.
▶ To delete the changes made under the Comment tab, click Clear.
3. Click Print to print images. Or Click Close to cancel.

[Figure 6.18 Image Print]

6-27
 Operation Manual

Transferring via DICOM

The selected image(s) can be transferred via DICOM. The corresponding icon is enabled only when
image(s) are selected. The buttons are disabled in products in which the DICOM option is not enabled.
1. Select image(s) and then click the Send Image to DICOM Storage icon. The DICOM Storage window
will be displayed.
2. Click the Transfer. or click Close to cancel.

[Figure 6.19 DICOM Storage]

Printing via DICOM

The selected image(s) can be printed via DICOM. The corresponding icon is enabled only when image(s)
are selected. The buttons are disabled in products in which the DICOM option is not enabled.
1. Select image(s) and then click the Send Image to DICOM Print icon. The DICOM Printer window will
be displayed.
2. Click Transfer to transfer the selected images to the DICOM Server for printing. Or click Close to can-
cel.

[Figure 6.20 DICOM Printer]

6-28
 Chapter 6 Image Management

Exporting Images

NOTE: The Export function will not work if a file or directory name contains blank(s).

1. Click the Export Image icon. The Image Export window will be displayed.
2. Specify the required parameters including directory, drive, file name and format.
3. Click Export to start. Or click Close to cancel.

[Figure 6.21 Image Export]

6-29
 Operation Manual

Transferring via E-mail

1. Click the Send E-mail icon. The E-mail window will be displayed.
2. Specify the required settings including Sender and Recipient.
3. After confirming the attached images in the thumbnail list, enter message text.
4. Click Send to transfer the images. Or click Cancel to cancel.

[Figure 6.22 E-mail]

NOTE:
If an e-mail cannot be sent when the Mail Server is working properly, check the following:
XX
LAN cable connection
The E-mail option is enabled under Setup > utility.
XX
XX
The ICMP (ping) of the corresponding Mail Server is open. If it is closed, the Email function may
not work properly.

Deleting Images
Click the Delete Image icon. Click OK to delete the selected image. However, images of the patient being
diagnosed cannot be deleted.

6-30
 Chapter 6 Image Management

Selecting All Images

Click the Select All Images icon. All images included in the current exam will be selected in yellow.

Deselecting All Images

Press the Deselect All Images icon. All selected images will be deselected and the yellow marking will
disappear.

Storage Manager

Click the Device icon. The Storage Manager screen will be displayed. For more information on Storage
Manager, please refer to Chapter 7 ‘Utilities.’

Exiting SONOVIEW
Click the Exit icon. Alternatively, you can also press the Review or the Exit button to exit SONOVIEW.

6-31
Chapter 7
Utilities

‹‹Setup..................................................................7-3
General ........................................................................................7-4
Display .........................................................................................7-8
Annotate....................................................................................7-11
Peripherals................................................................................7-15
User Defined Key....................................................................7-18
Miscellaneous..........................................................................7-20
Option.........................................................................................7-24
DICOM (optional)....................................................................7-25
Auto Calc....................................................................................7-41
About..........................................................................................7-42

‹‹Measurement Setup...................................... 7-43

General ......................................................................................7-44
Obstetrics..................................................................................7-53
Cardiac .......................................................................................7-62
Vascular .....................................................................................7-64
Fetal Echo..................................................................................7-66

‹‹Utility............................................................... 7-67
Storage Manager....................................................................7-67

‹‹ECG.................................................................. 7-69
Chapter 7
‹‹Stress Echo (Optional)................................... 7-72
Setting a Protocol...................................................................7-72
Starting a Protocol And Capturing Images..................7-78
Image Review..........................................................................7-85

‹‹Strain Image (optional)................................. 7-90

Strain...........................................................................................7-91
Auto EF.......................................................................................7-98
TMAD.......................................................................................7-101
 Chapter 7 Utilities

Setup
This mode is used for system settings. It does not affect image output. The setup may be modified
depending on specific needs or preferences.

1. Press the F1 key, Setup, on the keyboard.

2. The Setup screen will appear. Select a tab that has items to specify.
3. Specify settings for each item.
4. The setting is completed when you press the F1 key again or the [6] Close dial-button on the soft menu.
Or you may press the Exit button on the control panel.

Selecting a tab
Tips!
You can select a tab in either of two ways as desired.
XX
Use the trackball and the Set button to select a tab.
XX
Rotate the [1] dial-button on the softmenu to select a tab.

[Figure 7.1 Setup - Softmenu]

7-3
 Operation Manual

General
Select the General tab in the Setup screen. You can specify general settings such as title settings.

[Figure 7.2 Setup - General]

Title
You can specify information displayed in the title area on the screen.

■■ Institution
Enter the name of the hospital/institution where the product is installed.

NOTE: You cannot input following characters; # [ “ ; : ? | ￦

7-4
 Chapter 7 Utilities

■■ Date

The current date is displayed. To change the date, press .

NOTE:
XX
You cannot change the date and time when a patient ID is registered. To change the date and
time, you should finish the current diagnosis by pressing the End Exam button on the control
panel.
XX
You can select the year from 2006 to 2027.

How to set the date and time

Tips!
1. Click in the Date (or Time) button.
2. Set the date and time by using the trackball and the Set button on the control panel.
3. If it is properly set, click Apply to apply changes. Click OK to close the Date & Time window. To
cancel, click Cancel or the Exit button on the control panel.

[Figure 7.3 Date & Time]

■■ Date Format
Specify the date format. Select a desired date format by pressing the combo button. The date format
that you specify will be applied to various date fields in Patient Information.

■■ Time
The current time is displayed.

■■ Time Format
Specify the time format. Select a desired time format by pressing the combo button.

7-5
 Operation Manual

Acquisition Setting
■■ AcquisitionMethod
Specify the method and range in which an image is acquired and saved.
You can select ECG Beat, Time or Manual. Note that ECG Beat can be selected only when ECG is on.
▶▶ECG Beat: Specify the heart beat as 1 – 8 beats.

▶▶Time: Specify it as 1~25 seconds.

Specify retrospective as 1~8ch(sec).
▶▶Manual: After you press the Acquire button, the images are automatically saved until you press
the button again.

■■ Prospective
When the Acquire button is pressed during scanning, the subsequent images are saved.

■■ Retrospective
When the Acquire button is pressed during scanning, the previous images are saved.

Control
■■ Trackball Speed for Scan Mode
Sets the trackball speed in scan mode. (Slow, Normal, Fast).

■■ Trackball Speed for Measurement

Sets the trackball speed at the time of measurement. (Slow, Normal, Fast). The slower the trackball
moves, the more useful for fine measurement.

Scan Mode
■■ Simultaneous Mode
This determines whether to enable simultaneous mode in Spectral Doppler Mode.
▶▶Off: Select this if you do not wish to use simultaneous mode.

▶▶Allow B/PW: Select this if you do not wish to use simultaneous mode in 2D/C/PW modes but do
wish to use it in 2D/PW mode.
▶▶Allow B/C/PW: Select this if you wish to use simultaneous mode for both 2D/PW and for 2D/C/PW.

7-6
 Chapter 7 Utilities

■■ Dual / Quad Operation

Specify whether the selected area is activated in Dual or Quad mode. If ‘Auto Unfreeze’ is selected, the
selected area will be activated in Dual or Quad mode all the time.

■■ 2D/C Live
Selects the position of the color Doppler mode in the 2D/C Live mode. Select Left or Right.

■■ Freeze Action
Select a function that will be executed automatically when the Freeze button is pressed on the control
panel. Select from None, Bodymarker, Caliper, or Measure.

■■ EndExam Action
Select a function that will be executed automatically when the End Exam button is pressed on the
control panel.
▶▶EndExam Only: The 2D mode screen will appear when the End Exam button is clicked.

▶▶EndExam + Patient: The Patient Information screen will appear when the End Exam button is
clicked.

■■ Option
Select an item to use with the checkbox. You can select several items at a time.
▶▶Auto Freeze: The scan mode will be terminated automatically if the product is not used for longer
than 10 minutes.

NOTE: The Auto Freeze function will be activated after 20 minutes in 4D mode.

▶▶HPRF: Uses the HPRF (High Pulse Repetition Frequency) function. Available in the PW Spectral
Doppler Mode only.
▶▶Color Map Auto invert: The color map will be inverted automatically. Applicable only when the
steer is changed in 2D/C/D mode, C mode, or DPDI mode in the PD mode.
▶▶Fix Doppler Angle 60°: Used to specify the sample volume’s default angle in PW spectral Doppler
mode with vascular as the application. Selecting the checkbox resets the sample volume angle to
60° each time PW spectral Doppler mode is started.
▶▶Save Cine after Preview: With the checkbox selected, pressing the Acquire button to save a cine
image displays a preview on the screen. ‘Cine Pre-View’ is shown in the user information area.

7-7
 Operation Manual

Display
Select the Display tab in the Setup screen. Specify display-related options.

[Figure 7.4 Setup -Display]

Display
■■ Option
Select an item to use with the checkbox. You can select several items at a time.
▶▶VCR Counter: Sets whether the VCR Counter will be displayed on the screen or not, when a VCR is
connected to the serial port. If the counter hides the screen, you can turn off this function. Then,
the counter will be shown during recording only.
▶▶Name + Age: The patient ID, name, and age will be displayed together.

▶▶Name + Birthday: The patient ID, name and patient’s birthday will be displayed together.

NOTE: ‘Name + Age’ and ‘Name + Birth’ cannot be used at the same time.

7-8
 Chapter 7 Utilities

▶▶Display Blank: Uses a screen saver. You can set the screen saver activation time (1~30 minutes).

▶▶TI Display: Selects the TI (Thermal Index) – Tis (Soft tissue), TIb (Bone), or Tic (Cranial bone).

▶▶TGC Line: Sets whether the TGC line will be displayed or not.

▶▶Image Info: Sets whether the image information will be displayed or not. If the image information
hides the image, turn off this function.

■■ Doppler Axis
Selects a scale unit of the axis in the Spectral Doppler mode.
▶▶Velocity: Shows the Doppler axis scale in m/s (or cm/s).

▶▶Frequency: Shows the Doppler axis scale in kHz.

Font
■■ Font
Specify the target for which you want to set the font. Choose from Document Font and Measure Result
Font.

■■ Font Name
Select the font type to use.

■■ Font Size
Select the font size to use.

■■ Font Color
Select the font colour to use.

■■ Preview
Preview window displays the font you selected.

■■ Default
Go back to the default setting like below.

7-9
 Operation Manual

Document Font Measure Result Font

Font Name Helvetica Verdana

Font Size 11 11
Font Color White Yellow

NOTE: Certain fonts may not appear correctly on the screen.

7-10
 Chapter 7 Utilities

Annotate
Select the Annotate tab in the Setup screen. Sets the information related to BodyMarker and text input.

[Figure 7.5 Setup -Annotate]

BodyMarker
■■ Option
Select an item to use with the checkbox.
▶▶BodyMarker Auto Active: BodyMarker mode will be executed automatically when the active image
area is changed in the multiple image mode.

■■ BodyMarker Edit
The BodyMarker Edit screen will appear. You can set the BodyMarker to use.

7-11
 Operation Manual

 ‚

[Figure 7.6 BodyMarker Edit]

▶▶BodyMarker Edit screen

 E ntire BodyMarker list: Shows all available BodyMarkers. The list varies depending on the group
selected from “Group”. The “current page/total number of pages” will be displayed under the list.
If the list is longer than two pages, use [è] or [ç] to change the page.
‚ BodyMarker list of the probe-preset that is currently in use: Body Marker list of the probe-preset
that is currently being used by the system will be displayed. The “current page/total number
of pages” will be displayed under the list. If the list is longer than two pages, use [è] or [ç] to
change the page.
▶▶Add BodyMarker

Double click the BodyMarker to add from the left list (). The selected BodyMarker will be added
to the right list (‚).

NOTE: Each list can contain 1~100 BodyMarkers.

▶▶Delete BodyMarker

Double click the BodyMarker to delete it from the right list (‚).

7-12
 Chapter 7 Utilities

▶▶Save and cancel a BodyMarker list

Click Save to save the list. Click Close to cancel.

▶▶Reset a BodyMarker list

Click Reset. The initial system setting will be restored.

Text Setup
Select an item to use with the checkbox. You can select several items at a time.

■■ Options
▶▶Quick Text: You can switch to the text mode immediately by pressing the Text character key on a
keyboard.

NOTE:
XXQuick Text is system default setting.
You can switch to the text mode by pressing the F3 Text key on the keyboard, if the Quick Text function
XX
is not set.

▶▶Auto Text Erase: All entered text will be deleted automatically, if the Freeze button is pressed after
entering the text and the scan mode is restored.
▶▶Boot up Caps Lock on: All entered text will be converted to uppercase.

▶▶Autotext: If abbreviated text is entered, the system will input the full word automatically. For
example, if you input “AC”, the system will search the full word and display it on the screen as
“Abdominal Circumference”.
If the Autotext function is activated, the abbreviation list will appear on the screen when entering the
text.

[Figure 7.7 Abbreviation list]

The system contains a list of abbreviated words for this function. You can add or edit the abbreviated
words to your preferences.

7-13
 Operation Manual

Setting a list of abbreviated words

Tips!
Press Autotext Edit to use the abbreviated word list stored in the system. The Autotext Edit screen
will appear.
Click Close to save and finish the abbreviated word list.

[Figure 7.8 Autotext Edit]

XX
Modifying a word
1. Select the word to modify from the list, using the trackball or Set button. The selected word
will be displayed in “Abbreviation” and its full word in “Full Word” column.
2. Modify the word in the “Abbreviation” and “Full Word” columns. The abbreviation list will be
modified in real time.
XX
Adding a word
1. Press the New button.
2. Input a word in “Abbreviation” and its full word in “Full Word”. The word will be added to the
abbreviated word list.
XX
Deleting a word
1. Select the word to delete from the list, using the trackball or Set button. The selected word
will be displayed in “Abbreviation” and its full word in “Full Word” column.
2. Click the Delete button. A warning message will appear.
3. Click OK to confirm deletion. The selected word will be removed from the abbreviated word
list. Or, click Cancel to cancel deleting.
XX
Setting word input delay time
Sets the time waited before converting the abbreviated word into the full word, when entering
the text. Set the delay time in 0.1~5 seconds in “Autotext Delay Time” at the bottom of the screen.

▶▶Clear Annotation: If the checkbox is selected, all entered annotations will be deleted when
changing the mode.

7-14
 Chapter 7 Utilities

Peripherals
Select the Peripherals tab in the Setup screen. You can configure keys, buttons and the peripheral devices
connected to the product.

[Figure 7.9 Setup -Peripherals]

7-15
 Operation Manual

Peripherals
■■ VCR Model
Select the type of VCR Model from Panasonic MD 835, Sony DVO-1000MD, JVC BD-X201 or Mitsubishi
MD3000. You should reboot the system before you can use the configured VCR.

■■ COM
Configure a device to connect to a serial port. Available devices are VCR and Open Line Transfer. If you
select Reserve, the COM port will not be used.

■■ VCR Source
Sets a VCR source. Select VHS or S-VHS.

Foot Switch
Set the function of the left and right pedals of the foot switch. You can select one of the following
functions for each pedal.

Foot Switch Functions

Freeze
Update
Record
Print
Store Clip

7-16
 Chapter 7 Utilities

Print Setup
■■ Printer Orientation

NOTE: This option is available only for an Echo printer that uses roll paper.

Set the type and page orientation of the Echo printer.

▶▶Printer: Select either Sony UP-D897 or Mitsubishi P93D by using the combo button.

▶▶Portrait: When printed, the long part of the page is vertical.

▶▶Landscape: When printed, the long part of the page is horizontal.

■■ Print Key
Set the functionality of the Print buttons on the control panel. Select one from Analog Printer, Digital
Printer, or Record. Also set a printer or VCR to use when each button is pressed.

■■ System Printer
Set a printer to print saved images or screens.

■■ Measure Printer
Select the printer used to print measurement reports.

NOTE: Even though an Echo printer is selected, measurement reports are printed in the current
report format.

■■ Local Printing Area

Set the area that will be printed.
▶▶Full Screen (1280 * 1024): Print the full monitor screen.

▶▶Video Out (1024 * 768): Print part of the monitor screen containing the image area.

▶▶Image Only: Print only the image area.

■■ Printing Image Adjustment

Adjust the print quality of images. Select the image type and adjust gamma, brightness, and contrast.
When Reset Defaults is clicked, settings will be initialized.

7-17
 Operation Manual

User Defined Key

Select the User Defined Key tab in the Setup screen.

[Figure 7.10 Setup –User Defined key]

Set/Exit Key Setup

■■ Set/Exit Key Switch
Sets the function of the buttons located to the left and right of the trackball on the control panel.
▶▶Set/Set: Assigns the Set button to both the left and right buttons.

▶▶Set/Exit: Sets the left button to Set and the right button to Exit.

▶▶Exit/Set: Sets the left button to Exit and the right button to Set.

7-18
 Chapter 7 Utilities

Function Setup
Selects functions for Zoom, Focus and Depth dial-buttons on the control panel.

Zoom In
„„
Selects the direction in which to rotate the Zoom dial to zoom in on an image.

Clockwise: Rotating the dial-button clockwise zooms in on an image.

XX

Counterclockwise: Rotating the dial-button counterclockwise zooms in on an image.

XX

Focus Up
„„
Selects the direction in which to rotate the Focus dial to adjust the focus depth.

Clockwise: Rotate the dial-button clockwise to increase the focus depth.

XX

Counterclockwise: Rotate the dial-button counterclockwise to increase the focus depth.

XX

Depth Up
„„
Selects the direction in which to rotate the Depth dial to adjust the scanning depth.

Clockwise: Rotate the dial-button clockwise to increase depth.

XX

Counterclockwise: Rotate the dial-button counterclockwise to increase depth.

XX

7-19
 Operation Manual

Miscellaneous
Select the Miscellaneous tab in the Setup screen.

[Figure 7.11 Setup - Miscellaneous]

E-mail
Set the server to send/receive e-mails, using this product.

■■ Mail (SMTP) Server

Set the e-mail server.

■■ Port No.
Input the port number.

■■ ID
Set the connection ID of the e-mail server to use.

■■ Password
Set the connection password of the e-mail server to use.

Buzzer Control
Tells you when a button is in use by making a sound whenever a button or dial-button is used.

Buzzer Sound
If “On” is selected, beep sound will be generated each time a button or dial-button is used.

7-20
 Chapter 7 Utilities

Account
Manages the user ID and password.

■■ User ID and Password

Sets whether the user account function (log-in) will be used or not. If the Account is On, it will be
applied under the following conditions.
▶▶Blank Image (Screen Saver)

▶▶Entering Sonoview/Patient Information

▶▶Search window in Patient Information

■■ Set ID and Password

The administrator only function. The administrator can manage the account after log-in. The Account
List window will be activated.
▶▶Add: Input the data in User ID, Password, and Name column and click the Add button to add a
new ID.
▶▶Modify: Saves the modified content.

▶▶Delete: Deletes the selected ID.

▶▶Close: Completes setting.

■■ Log-in
The administrator can set the user ID after logging-in as an administrator. Please contact the service
engineer for more information on the Admin account.

NOTE:
The Admin account cannot be deleted.
If the user account function is activated, other Exams cannot be retrieved if not logged-in.
A password should be 6–15 digits long and contain a combination of at least three items out of the
following.
XX
Uppercase English
XX
Lowercase English
XX
Numbers
XX
Special characters

7-21
 Operation Manual

Export Image Compensation

Set the post curve of the image to use the DICOM service. Press the button to display the Compensation
window.
Adjust Gamma, Brightness, and Contrast using the slide buttons. If Default is clicked, system default
settings will be restored.

Compensation
Tips!
If Post Curve is used, the image can be displayed similar to the original image when reviewing the image
on another monitor, and diagnosis can be performed conveniently.

[Figure 7.12 Compensation]

Patient Name Formatting

The patient name can be displayed in Asian languages such as Korean, Chinese, and Japanese. Press Reset
to initialize settings.

NOTE: This button will only appear on the product when the Asian Patient function is applied.

■■ Name Formatting
Sets how to display the patient’s name.
▶▶Default: Displays the patient’s name in the order: family, given, and middle name. (e.g.,; Smith,
Robert L)
▶▶Custom: Sets order of the family, given, and middle name in “Items”, and sets comma, space, and
omission in “Separator”.

■■ Representation Priority
Patient Information
Sets how to display the patient’s name. Selects one of Roman, Ideographic, and Phonetic by order of
the preferred use. (Sets order in numbers -1, 2, 3)

7-22
 Chapter 7 Utilities

Option
Select the Option tab in the Setup screen. Sets or releases the use of the optional software or hardware.

[Figure 7.13 Setup -Option]

* The actual system may not be as shown.

Options
The list of option software will appear.

NOTE: Please contact the shop where you purchased this product to buy optional software.

■■ Option
Shows the type of optional software that can be installed in this product.

■■ Status
Shows the current status of optional software.
▶▶Lock_Not Installed: Hardware is not connected.

▶▶Lock_Unregistered: The software license is not registered yet.

▶▶Lock _Installed: Hardware is installed but cannot be used yet.

▶▶Lock_Expired: Unavailable because the license period is expired, while Restricted is set.

7-23
 Operation Manual

▶▶Unlock_Permanent: H/W or S/W can be used regardless of the use term.

▶▶Unlock_Restricted: H/W or S/W can be used only for the certain period of time.

■■ HW Configuration
The list of optional hardware will appear. Currently, only ECG is supported.

7-24
 Chapter 7 Utilities

DICOM (optional)
Select the DICOM tab in the Setup screen. You can configure the DICOM (Digital Imaging and Communication
in Medicine) operation and the DICOM server.

NOTE: For more information, please refer to the user manual for the server equipment or the DICOM
Conformance Statement.

[Figure 7.14 Setup -DICOM]

7-25
 Operation Manual

DICOM Configuration
The information on the DICOM server used by the system is displayed.
You can change the information, or add or delete a server. The server information is used to identify
DICOM for the system in a network. It is also used to transfer data between other DICOM servers.

NOTE: Please consult your network administrator to set IP Address, AE Title and Port No.

■■ AE Title
Enter the name of the DICOM AE (Application Entity). The title is used to identify devices that use
DICOM in a network.

■■ Station Name
Enter the name of the system. Along with AE Title, it is often used to identify the system in the DICOM
network.

■■ Port No.
Enter the port number of the server being used.

DICOM Send Format

Specify the storage format for the 2D or Color mode images for which the DICOM services will be used.
Select either Color or Gray by using the combo button If you select Gray, images are saved only in
grayscale format.

NOTE: The DICOM Send Format settings are applied at the time when an image is saved. For example,
when set to Gray, an image is saved as a grayscale image.

DICOM Compression
Specify whether to compress the still (Cine) images for which DICOM services will be used. Select either
Uncompressed or JPEG Baseline by using the combo button. When Uncompressed is selected, images are
saved without being compressed.

7-26
 Chapter 7 Utilities

NOTE: The DICOM Compression setting is applied at the time an image is saved. For example, when set
to JPEG Baseline, an image is compressed when it is saved.
However, the Cine image can be compressed to JPEG baseline regardless of settings.

Store SR at End of Exam

If the checkbox is selected, the SR (Structured Report) file will be automatically saved when the exam is
ended.

Adding DICOM Service

Click Add on the screen. The system is switched to a screen where you can enter a DICOM service to add.
After adding a service, click Save to save the information. Click Cancel to cancel.

■■ Services
Select the type of service to use via DICOM. The supported DICOM servers are Storage, Print, Worklist,
PPS, SC and Storage SR.

■■ Alias
Enter the name of the DICOM server.

■■ AE Title
Enter the AE title of the DICOM server. Consult your network administrator before specifying this
option.

■■ Transfer Mode
Select a transfer method:
▶▶Batch: Send all saved images when you click the End Exam button.

▶▶Send As You Go: Send an image whenever you press the Acquire button to save it.

▶▶Manual: Send the selected image in Exam List or SonoView.

■■ Connect Timeout
Specify how long the system will wait until it receives a response from the DICOM server. You can
specify it in seconds.

7-27
 Operation Manual

■■ IP Address
Enter the IP address of the server being used. Consult your network administrator before specifying this
option.

■■ Port no.
Enter the port number of the server being used. Consult your network administrator before specifying
this option.

■■ Retry Interval
Specify how long the system will wait before it retries when transmission fails. You can specify it in
seconds.

■■ Maximum Retries
Specify how many times the system will retry when transmission fails.

Storage Server Information

Select STORAGE under Services. Configure the Image Storage Service using DICOM.

[Figure 7.15 DICOM Configuration -Storage]

7-28
 Chapter 7 Utilities

■■ Storage Options
▶▶Send Cine Loops: If the checkbox is selected, Cine Loops can be transferred.

▶▶Include Pixel Spacing: The area information used by CT or X-Ray examination will be added, as well
as the area information used by ultrasonography. “Measure” can be measured in the PACS system
that doesn’t support the ultrasonic information area.

NOTE: However, 2D or color Doppler mode is the image that is supported, and depth should be same for
all images in the multiple image mode.

■■ VOI LUT Setup

Configure VOI LUT (Value Of Interest Look Up Table). Adjust the brightness and contrast of a DICOM
image when saving it. The saved image can be viewed with any PACS device that has DICOM VOI LUT
implemented.
▶▶Window Center: Enter a value for the DICOM Tag (0028, 1050) setting. The setting value indicates
the brightness of an image that is displayed by the Storage service. Relative to 128, a higher value
results in a darker image. Note that this function can be used only when it is supported by the
Storage service.
▶▶Window Width: Enter a value for the DICOM Tag (0028, 1051) setting. The setting value indicates
the brightness of an image that is displayed by the Storage service. Relative to 256, higher values
result in lower contrast. Note that this function is available only when it is supported by the
Storage service.

Print Server Information

Select PRINT under Services. Configure the Print Service using DICOM.

NOTE:
XXYou can configure a printer connected to the DICOM network only.
XX
Depending on the printer, some of the following functions may not be available. Before configuring a
printer service, please refer to the user manual for the printer or the DICOM Conformance Statement.

■■ Color
Specify whether to use colors. Select Grayscale or RGB.

7-29
 Operation Manual

■■ Format
Specify the paper layout. Select from 1ⅹ1, 1ⅹ2, 2ⅹ2, 2ⅹ3, 3ⅹ3, 3ⅹ4, 3ⅹ5, 4ⅹ4, 4ⅹ5 and 4ⅹ6.

■■ Orientation
Specify the paper orientation. Select Landscape or Portrait.

■■ Magnification
When resizing an image to print, specify the interpolation. Select from Replicate, Bilinear, Cubic and
None.

■■ Border Density
Specify the border density of an image to print. Select Black or White.

■■ Empty Density
Specify the background color of an image to print. Select Black or White.

■■ Min Density
Specify the minimum brightness of an image to print. If this option is not specified, the default value is
applied.

■■ Max Density
Specify the maximum brightness of an image to print. If this option is not specified, the default value is
applied.

■■ Medium Type
Specify the paper type. Select from Paper, Clear Film, Blue Film, Mammo Clear Film and Mammo Blue
Film.

■■ Film Size
Specify the paper size. Select from 8 inchⅹ10 inch, 5 inchⅹ11 inch, 10 inchⅹ12 inch, 10 inchⅹ
14 inch, 11 inchⅹ14 inch, 11 inchⅹ17 inch, 14 inchⅹ14 inch, 14 inchⅹ17 inch, 24cmⅹ24cm,
24cmⅹ30cm, A4 and A3.

7-30
 Chapter 7 Utilities

■■ Destination
Specify the paper pathway. Select Magazine or Processor.

■■ Smoothing Type
This option is available only when Magnification is set to CUBIC. Enter a value specified in the DICOM
Conformance Statement for the printer.

■■ Priority
Specify a priority for the print command. Select from High, Med and Low.

■■ Copies
Enter the number of copies between 1 and 99.

■■ Configuration Info
Specify the unique value for a printer. Please refer to the DICOM Conformance Statement for the printer.

[Figure 7.16 DICOM Configuration -Print]

7-31
 Operation Manual

Worklist Server Information

Select WORKLIST under Services. Configure the Modality Worklist Service using DICOM.

■■ Show Worklist first when the patient screen opens

If the checkbox is selected, the “Search” tab will appear on the Patient Information screen when Patient
is clicked. If not selected, the “Study Information” tab will appear.

■■ Update Method
Specify the update method for Worklist.
▶▶Only on user Request: Update only when asked by the user.

To update a worklist, in the Search tab on the Patient Information screen, select Worklist for Search
Tips!
Source and click Search.

▶▶On Startup and Every: Update automatically at a specified interval after the system boots and
Worklist is updated.

■■ Scheduled Station AE Title

Specify the range of AE Title to retrieve from the Worklist server in a hospital.
▶▶Any: Retrieve the patient list stored in all AE Titles in the server.

▶▶This System: Retrieve the patient list specified under the DICOM tab.

▶▶Another: Retrieve the patient list stored in the AE Title specified by the user.

NOTE: This option is available only when the Worklist server is enabled.

■■ Start Date
Specify the range of dates to search.
▶▶Today: Retrieve the patient list for the current date.

▶▶Range: Retrieve the patient list for n days before and n days after the current date.

▶▶Past Week: Retrieve the patient list for 7 days before the current date.

▶▶Past Month: Retrieve the patient list for a month before the current date.

▶▶Custom Date: Specify a certain date and retrieve the patient list for that date.

7-32
 Chapter 7 Utilities

[Figure 7.17 DICOM Configuration -Worklist]

7-33
 Operation Manual

PPS Server Information

Select PPS (Performed Procedure Step) under Services. Configure the Modality Performed Procedure Step
Service using DICOM.
It can be configured in the same way as for the Storage server.

■■ Always complete exams

If the check box is selected, the Exam will be always reported as “completed”. If the checkbox is not
selected, the cancellation message will be sent to the RIS server when the Cancel button is clicked.
Other setting methods follow the same method with the storage server.

[Figure 7.18 DICOM Configuration -PPS]

7-34
 Chapter 7 Utilities

SC Server Information
Select SC (Storage Commitment) under Services. Configure the Storage Commitment Service using DICOM.
The Storage Commitment Service is used after a diagnosis is finished and all saved images and reports are
transferred.

■■ Associated Storage Server

Select an image storage server to connect.

[Figure 7.19 DICOM Configuration -SC]

7-35
 Operation Manual

Storage SR Server Information

Select Storage SR (Storage Structured Report) under Services. Configure the Report Storage Service using
DICOM.
It can be configured in the same way as for the Storage server.

[Figure 7.20 DICOM Configuration –Storage SR]

Changing DICOM Information

Select a service and click Edit on the screen. The information on the selected service will appear.
After changing the information, click Save to save the changes. Click Cancel to cancel.

Deleting DICOM Service

Select a service and click Delete on the screen. Or, click Cancel to cancel.

Testing DICOM Server

Select a service and click Test on the screen. The connection with the selected service is tested and the
results are shown under the Ping and Verify items. If the result is Normal, it indicates that the connection
is normal.

7-36
 Chapter 7 Utilities

Managing DICOM
Click Queue on the screen to switch to the DICOM Job Status screen. You can review the current job status
using the Job ID, Patient ID, etc.
The following describes the elements of the DICOM Job Status screen.
① Job ID: Display the job ID.
② Patient ID: Display the patient ID.
③ Alias: Display the alias set in the DICOM Configuration screen.
④ Type: Display the job type. The available job types are Storage, Print, Storage SR, MPPS Start, MPPS
End, and Storage CMT.
⑤ Instances: Display the number of instances. What this denotes differs depending on the job type.
For ‘Storage’ and ‘Print’, it means the number of images. For ‘Storage SR’, it means the amount of
measurement data. For MPPS Start, it is always displayed as 0.
⑥ Data/Time: Display the date and time when the job was created.
⑦ Status: Display the current status of the job.

Status Description

Fail The job failed.

Transfer The job is in progress.

The job has been stopped during execution. It will be switched to the Ready state
Imperfect
immediately.

Wait The job is waiting for execution.

Wait Resp The job is waiting for a response.

The job is waiting for a retry. This occurs when the job has failed but the maximum retry
Hold
count is not yet reached.

Ready The job is waiting for execution. This occurs when the network is not connected.

The Ready state is not completed. This occurs when MPPS (Modality Performed Procedure
Not Ready Step) End occurs before MPPS Start is completed or the case that a Storage or Print batch
job is not completed

7-37
 Operation Manual

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

[Figure 7.21 DICOM Job Status]

■■ Network Status
Display the network connection status. When connected, ‘Connected’ is displayed. When disconnected,
‘Disconnected’ is displayed.

■■ Number of Jobs
Display the number of jobs listed in the DICOM Job Status screen.

■■ Log
Display the DICOM Log window.

■■ Retry
Perform the selected job again. This button is enabled only when the status of the selected job is Fail or
Wait Resp.

7-38
 Chapter 7 Utilities

■■ Retry All
Retry all jobs for which the status is Fail.

■■ Delete
Delete the selected job. This button is enabled only when the status of the selected job is Fail,
Imperfect, Wait Resp, or Not Ready.

■■ Clear
Delete all jobs.

DICOM Log
Click Log on the DICOM Job Status window to display the DICOM Log window. This is used to manage the
history of all DICOM services performed on this product.

■■ Log Settings
Specify how log files will be managed.
▶▶Delete Archived Log Afterwards: Specify how long a log file will be archived. Enter a number in
days. If the specified time has elapsed after the log file was created, the file is deleted from the
system.
▶▶Log File Maximum Size: Specify the maximum size of a log file that can be archived. Enter a
number in Kb. A log file that is larger than the specified size is not archived on the system and
deleted immediately.

■■ DICOM Log
Display a list of log files with their information.
▶▶Select All: Select all log files.

▶▶Delete Selected Files: Delete the selected log file.

▶▶Copy Selected Files: Copy the selected log file to an external storage media.

▶▶View Selected File: Display the details of the selected log file on the screen.

▶▶Refresh: Update the information of a log file.

7-39
 Operation Manual

[Figure 7.22 DICOM Log]

7-40
 Chapter 7 Utilities

Auto Calc
Select the AutoCalc tab in the Setup screen. The Auto Calc function calculates specified measurement items
automatically with measurement data and is supported in Spectral Doppler Mode.

NOTE: The specified items will appear on the screen only when the [4] Auto Calc dial-button on the
softmenu is pressed in Spectral Doppler Mode.

[Figure 7.23 Setup-AutoCalc]

AutoCalc Setting
Enable or disable the following items for automatic calculation by checking their checkbox.
When the Peak Systolic Velocity and End Diastolic Velocity values are 0, not all results for the items will be
displayed on the screen.
In addition, the result value for Timed Averaged Mean Velocity is displayed only when Mean Trace is ‘On’.

7-41
 Operation Manual

About
Select the About tab in the Setup screen. Then, the product S/W version information will appear.
Click Detail to see the detailed version of the information related to the product.
Pressing View displays licensing-related information.

[Figure 7.24 Setup -About]

* The S/W version shown above can be different from the actual system version.

7-42
 Chapter 7 Utilities

Measurement Setup
Specify various setup options for measurement. The setup may be modified depending on specific needs or
preferences.

1. Click Measure Setup in the Setup screen or press the [5] Measure Setup dial-button in the soft menu.
Or in the Utility screen, you may press the [3] Measure Setup button in the soft menu.
2. When the Measure Setup screen appears, select a tab that has items to configure.
3. Specify settings for each item.
4. Press the [6] Close dial-button on the softmenu to finish setting. Or, press the Exit button on the control
panel to cancel.

Selecting a tab
Tips!
You can select a tab in either of two ways as desired.
XX
Use the trackball and the Set button to select a tab.
XX
Rotate the [1] Page Change dial-button on the softmenu to select a tab.

[Figure 7.25 Measure Setup- Soft menu]

7-43
 Operation Manual

General
Select the General tab at the Measure Setup screen. You can specify basic measurement options.

General Settings
Select the sub tab General under the General tab. You can specify basic measurement options.

[Figure 7.26 Measure Setup - General - General]

7-44
 Chapter 7 Utilities

Cursor & Method

■■ Line Marker Type
Specify the shape of the caliper cursor displayed on the screen. Either Cross Hair or Arrow Head can be
selected.

■■ Circ. and area method

Specify the method for measuring circumference and area. Either Ellipse or Trace can be selected.
By default, the selected method appears when the Caliper button is pressed. Therefore, you can start
measurement more easily by specifying the most commonly used measurement method. For more
information on Ellipse and Trace, please refer to the “Circumference and Area Measurement” section in
Chapter 5 “Measurement.”

■■ Apply Auto Resizing Line Marker

If the distance between the starting point of the measurement and the moving point is smaller than 50
pixels, the cursor size of the marker will be reduced automatically.

Line Type
From the following three options, select the line pattern to use when measuring a distance.

■■ Dotted Line
Display with dotted line.

■■ Hidden Dotted Line

Display start and end point of the line.

■■ Hidden Dotted line after Set

Display with dotted line during making line. After set the line with Set button, dotted line will be
disappeared.

Selecting Line Type

Tips!
TIf you select Hidden Dotted Line or Hidden Dotted Line after Set, you can keep images from being
interfered with by a measurement line.

7-45
 Operation Manual

Start Point of Measurement

Set a location indicated by the cursor. Set a start point during measurement.

▶ End Point of the Last: The cursor appears at the end point of the last measurement.
▶ Start Point of the Last: The cursor appears at the start point of the last measurement.
▶ Center of the Region: The cursor appears in the center of the image region.

Display
Specify items to display during measurement by checking their checkbox.

■■ Show Measured Value in Menu

Sets whether the measurement result will be displayed on the menu or not.

■■ Guideline
▶▶Display the Doppler Guideline: Sets whether the cross line will be displayed or not, when
measuring various items in the frozen state spectrum. This function is useful in estimating the
value roughly.
▶▶Display the M-Mode Guideline: Sets whether the cross line will be displayed or not, when
measuring various items in the frozen state of the M mode. This function is useful in estimating the
value roughly.

■■ Clear Function on UnFreeze

▶▶Clear Measure 2D Mode Result On Unfreeze: Sets whether the screen measurement result will be
deleted or not, when switching to the scan mode after performing measurement in 2D mode.
▶▶Clear Measure M/D Mode Result On Unfreeze: Sets whether the screen measurement result will be
deleted or not, when switching to the scan mode after performing measurements in M mode and
Doppler mode.

■■ Measurement Unit
Sets the measurement units. For small measurement targets, the mm units are useful in Dist, and the
m/s units are useful in Vel when the blood flow is fast.
▶▶Dist.: Selects a distance, dimension, or units of volume – cm scale or mm scale.

▶▶Vel: Selects the units of velocity – cm/s or m/s.

7-46
 Chapter 7 Utilities

NOTE: All the result values which have been measured up to now will be deleted if the measurement
units are changed.

■■ Measurement Results
▶▶Transparent BK color: Sets the transparency of the background on which the measurement result
is displayed.

Calc Menu
Select the Calc Menu tab under the General tab. Specify the measurement packages that will be used and
the order in which they will appear on the screen when the Calculator button is pressed.

[Figure 7.27 Measure Setup – General – Calc Menu]

7-47
 Operation Manual

Select Calc Package

Select a Calc package.

Check Calc Tabs

A measurement menu tab to be used in a selected measurement package is displayed.
Up to four tabs can be added, changed or deleted.
▶New: Create a new tab.
▶Copy: Create a new tab by copying a current tab.
▶Rename: Rename a created tab.
▶Delete: Delete a created tab.

Calc Menu Design

Set the measurement tab using Calc Menu Preview and Available Menu List.

▶ Calc Menu Preview: Preview the measurement menu.

▶ Available Menu List: The measurement items list that can be used in a selected measurement
package is displayed. If you wish to select more than two items, select measurement items while the
Ctrl key on the keyboard is being pressed.

■■ Adding a Calculation Package to Use

Select a calculation package you want to use from the right list and then click on the screen. The
selected package is added to the left-hand list.

■■ Removing a Calculation Package

Select a calculation package you don’t want to use from the left list and then click on the screen.

■■ Changing the Order of Calculation Packages

Select the calculation package for which you want to change the order from the left list and then
click or on the screen. The topmost package in the left list appears first when you press the
Calculator button.

7-48
 Chapter 7 Utilities

Factory
When Factory on the screen is clicked, settings are reset to their default values.

Report
Select the Report sub-tab under the General tab. Set the item related to the measurement report.

[Figure 7.28 Measure Setup - General -Report]

Report Header
Sets the information that will be displayed in the report header. Several items can be selected, and the
selected items will be displayed on all measurement reports.

■■ Hospital Info.
Information about the hospital where the product is installed. Hospital name, Diag. Physician, Ref.
Physician, and Sonographer can be selected.

■■ Patient Info.
The information on the patient. ID, name, Gender, Heart Rate, Birthday, Age, and BSA can be selected.

■■ Others
Any other comments. Description and Accession # can be selected.

7-49
 Operation Manual

Measurement Result
■■ Measurement Result Type: Sets the calculation method of the measurement value that will be
printed on the report.
▶▶Avg; Shows the average value of three recent measurement values.

▶▶Last; Shows the value measured last.

▶▶Max; Shows the largest measurement value.

▶▶Min; Shows the smallest measurement value.

OB/FH Header Layout

Specify item(s) to display under the header of obstetrics or fetal echo measurement reports. You can
select multiple items.

EFW
XX Pctl. (EFW)
XX
GA (EFW)
XX SD (EFW)
XX
Gravida
XX Aborta
XX
Para
XX Ectopic
XX

7-50
 Chapter 7 Utilities

Data Transfer
Select the Data Transfer sub-tab under the General tab. You can specify options for measurement reports
and printing.

[Figure 7.29 Measure Setup - General – Data Transfer]

Serial Transfer
Specify the data format in which data will be transferred. You can select from a text format and an XML
format.
This product uses an RS-232C USB serial cable to transfer data. Select the XML format to transfer data with
reporting tools such as Astraia, Sonoultra and Viewpoint.

NOTE: Before setting, make sure that COM is set to Open Line Transfer under the Peripherals tab in the
Setup screen.

Backup and Restore Measure Settings

Back up a user-defined table or restore the backed-up table to the system. Click BackUp or Restore and
specify desired options.

User Table Backup & Restore

Backs up the user-created table or restores the backed-up table to the system. Click BackUp or Restore
and set properly on the displayed screen.

7-51
 Operation Manual

DICOM SR Format
■■ General Report: Default format setting.

■■ ViewPoint: ViewPoint data format setting.

Caliper
Select the Caliper sub-tab under the General tab.
Specify whether additional information will be shown along with basic measurement values when basic
measurements are taken by pressing the Caliper button on the control panel. If this option is selected, the
additional information will be also saved and output along with measurement results.
If Application is set to Cardiac, the D Velocity, D A/B and D Trace items are changed.

NOTE: The Cardiac setting can be used only when probe preset is Cardiac or Pediatric Cardiology.

[Figure 7.30 Measure Setup - General –Caliper]

7-52
 Chapter 7 Utilities

Obstetrics
Select the OB tab on the Measure Setup screen. Here you can set items related to obstetrics measurement.

General
Select the sub-tab General under the OB tab. You can specify basic options for obstetrics measurement.

[Figure 7.31 Measure Setup – OB – General]

7-53
 Operation Manual

Percentile Information

Show Percentile Information

„„
Check the checkbox to use the Percentile Information.

Percentile Criteria
„„
Select a value that will be used for percentile calculation.

GA by LMP: The GA is calculated based on the maternal LMP.

XX

Estab. Due Date: The GA is calculated based on the Estab. Due Date under Patient Information.
XX

AUA (Average US GA): The GA is calculated using the average values of several ultrasound
XX
measurements.

Rank Information Method

„„
Specify how the growth range information will be displayed. The growth range information can be
used to observe fetal development and abnormality.

Standard Deviation: International standard deviation is used to indicate the fetal development.
XX
Fetal development and abnormality are observed on the basis of SD = 0 indicating the standard
development.

Pctl.: Fetal development is indicated in percentile. Fetal development and abnormality are
XX
observed on the basis of 50% indicating the standard development.

Bar (Graph): The percentile is shown in a bar graph. This option is available with OB reports only.
XX
The green color indicates normal development range, while the red color indicates abnormal
development range.

Fetal Weight Units

Specify the units for fetal weight measurement. Specify the primary and secondary units to use when
displaying the measurement results. The primary and secondary units can be combined to show
measurements in various units. The primary unit can be either ‘grams [g]’ or ‘lb + oz’ on the left. The
secondary unit can be specified by using the unit expression on the right. You must specify a different
unit than the primary unit.

‘lb + oz’ is a unit combining pounds and ounces, and ‘None’ indicates that no units are used.

7-54
 Chapter 7 Utilities

Clear Function on UnFreeze

This function is applied to obstetrics only.

„„Clear Measured 2D Mode Result On UnFreeze

Check the checkbox to delete 2D Mode results when UnFreeze is selected after measurement.

Clear Measure M/D Mode Result On UnFreeze

„„
Check the checkbox to delete M or D Mode results when UnFreeze is selected after measurement.

Number of Measure Results Displayed

Number of Results Displayed

„„
Set the number of lines that are used to display the measurement results on the screen.

OB Doppler Results
Set the display for each item of the Doppler Results to be shown on the screen of the OB package.

PSV : Disabled
XX PGmean: Enabled
XX
EDV: Disabled
XX S/D : Enabled
XX
TAPV: Enabled
XX D/S : Enabled
XX
TAMV : Enabled
XX PI: Enabled
XX
PGmax: Enabled
XX RI: Enabled
XX

OB Measurement Result

Measurement Result Type

„„
Specify the measurement result type. Select Avg., Last, Max., or Min. value.

7-55
 Operation Manual

Tables
Select the sub-tab Tables under the OB tab. You can specify references such as reference tables and
equations that will be used by each measurement item.

[Figure 7.32 Measurement Setup – OB – Tables]

Items
„„
This setting is intended for the measurement of the gestational age (GA) and the fetal size (Growth).
Select items in the following order:

1. Select measurement items from the list on the left.

2. Select a reference type from either the GA table or Growth table.

3. Select a reference from the list on the right.

Fetal Weight
„„
This setting is intended for the measurement of the estimated fetal weight (EFW). Select items in
the following order:

Select the EFW measurement method from EFW equation and EFW growth.
XX

Select a reference from the list.

XX
7-56
 Chapter 7 Utilities

Add a Reference
„„

NOTE: Observe the following directions when adding a table reference. If these conditions are not
met, a warning message appears and the reference is not saved.
XX
Input at least three types of data.
XX
If there are no Min and Max values, select Value Only for Table Type.

1. Press . The User Reference window will appear.

2. Enter a name and description for a new reference.

3. Specify the reference type as Table or Equation.

NOTE: EFW Equation can only set Equation, and EFW Growth can only set Table as the reference
type.

4. Click OK to go to the next step. The Editor screen will appear. Click Cancel to cancel.

5. Enter a reference.

6. Click Save to save the information. Click Cancel to cancel.

7. Click OK to finish. Click Cancel to cancel.

[Figure 7.33 User Reference]

7-57
 Operation Manual

Add Reference Table

Tips!
Clicking the Question Mark button shows the sources of the references. Clicking the question mark
button a second time hides the sources again.

[Figure 7.34 User Table]

Unit Information
The unit of the selected reference, such as Input, Output, SD, etc., is displayed.
Table Type
Select the table type for the selected reference. For the Growth Table, SD (Standard Deviation) is
displayed.
XX
Range Type: Set the Min. and Max. values of the selected reference and display them in a table.
The SD value varies according to the range selected by the user.
XX
Value Type: Only the measurement values entered by the user are displayed, regardless of the
range of Min., Max., and SD.
Other
XX
Show In Days: When the checkbox is selected, the table unit is changed from wd (Week-day) to
d (day).
XX
Cursor Movement for the Enter key: Specify the direction of cursor movement when the Enter
key on the alphanumeric keyboard is pressed while a table is being edited. Select from Right,
Down and Edit.

7-58
 Chapter 7 Utilities

Add Reference Equation

Tips!
If a reference appears in an equation, the following should be entered:
Equation
Enter a reference equation. Use the measurement calculator shown in the lower right corner.
Input Value Ranges
Enter the minimum (Low) and maximum (High) ranges for the selected reference.
Tolerance Information
Select the tolerance from w or d.

[Figure 7.35 User Equation]

View & Modify References

„„

1. Under Selection, select a Preset to delete.

2. Press and the Editor screen will appear.

3. Review or edit the reference.

EFW Sequential Measurement

„„
Specify the order of EFW measurements. Select a measurement item by using the trackball and the
Set button, and then change its position in the order by using the arrow buttons.

7-59
 Operation Manual

Calc & Graph

Select the sub-tab Calc & Graph under the OB tab. You can specify settings for calculation and graphs.

[Figure 7.36 Measure Setup – OB – Calc. & Graph]

Auto Calculations
Specify an item that will be calculated automatically. For example, if the MAD checkbox is selected
as shown above, when APD and TAD are measured, the measurements are used to calculate MAD
automatically, and the result is displayed on the screen. The results of automatic calculation may affect
GA and EDD information.

Ratio Calculations
Specify the measurements for which you wish the ratio to be calculated. For example, if the FL/BPD
checkbox is selected, when FL and BPD are measured, the ratio between them is calculated and
displayed on the screen. This ratio also appears in a report.

7-60
 Chapter 7 Utilities

Fetal Doppler Trend Graph

Specify whether to include PI and RI graphs for MCA (Mid Cerebral Artery) and UA (Umbilical Artery) in
an obstetrics report. Press and the Editor screen for the selected graph will appear.

Trend Graph
Specify whether to include a graph for a certain item or ratio in an obstetrics report. Press and the
Editor screen for the selected graph will appear.

7-61
 Operation Manual

Cardiac
Select the Cardiac tab in the Measure Setup screen. You can specify settings for cardiac measurement.

[Figure 7.37 Measure Setup - Cardiac]

Cursor & Method

■■ Circ. and Area method
Specify how a circumference and area is measured in a 2D cardiac image. Either Ellipse or Trace can be
selected.

■■ LV Volume Method
Specify how the volume of the left ventricle is measured. Teichholz, Cubed or Gibson can be selected.
For more information on calculation formulae, please refer to reference manual.

7-62
 Chapter 7 Utilities

Cardiac Measurement Result

■■ Measurement Result Type
Set a measurement method. Select Avg., Last, Max. or Min. value..

Number of Measure Results Displayed

■■ Number of Result Displayed
Specify the number of lines for measurement results that are displayed on the screen.

Type of Derived Calc Results Displayed

Set a display method for measurement results. Select ‘Brief’ for a brief display and ‘Detailed’ for a detailed
display.

WMS Level Select

Specify which WMS diagram to use in the Stress Echo Review screen.

<4 Level> <5 Level> <7 Level>

[Figure 7.38 WMS Level]

7-63
 Operation Manual

Vascular
Select the Vascular tab in the Measure Setup screen. You can specify settings for vascular measurement. The
settings above are applied to Carotid, Arterial, Venous, Renal, and TCD

[Figure 7.39 Measure Setup - Vascular]

A/B Ratio
Specify each individual peak velocity for which a ratio between A and B will be calculated.

ICA/CCA Ratio
Specify each individual measurement item that will be used for the ICA/CCA ratio.

Doppler Results
Set the doppler measurement items that will be displayed with the measurement results. In the Vascular
item, set the Doppler measurement items that will be displayed on the screen when measuring Trace, PSV,
or EDV.

7-64
 Chapter 7 Utilities

Vascular Measurement Result

■■ Measurement Result Type
Set a measurement method. Select Avg., Last, Max. or Min. value.

Number of Measure Results Displayed

■■ Number of Result Displayed
Specify the number of lines for measurement results that are displayed on the screen.

7-65
 Operation Manual

Fetal Echo
Select the Fetal Echo tab on the Measure Setup screen. You can specify settings for fetal echo measurement.

[Figure 7.40 Measure Setup - Fetal Echo]

Cursor & Method

■■ Circ. And Area Method
Specify how a circumference and area is measured in a 2D fetal cardiac image. Either Ellipse or Trace can
be selected.

■■ LV Volume Method
Select the method of calculating the volume of the left ventricle - Teichholz, Cubed, or Gibson.

Fetal Echo Measurement Result

■■ Measurement Result Type
Set a measurement method. Select Avg, Last, Max or Min value.

Number of Measure Results Displayed

■■ Number of Result Displayed
Specify the number of lines for measurement results that are displayed on the screen.

7-66
 Chapter 7 Utilities

Utility
1. Press the F8 key, Utility, on the keyboard. The Utility menu appears on the soft menu screen.
2. Select items for use with the dial buttons beneath the soft menu.

[Figure 7.41 Utility - Softmenu]

Storage Manager
Press the dial-button [1] Storage Manager beneath the soft menu. All disk drives mounted in the system will
be shown. The drive type, available space and total space for each drive are displayed.

Storage Manager is a program that lets you manage various storage devices connected to the system. You can
remove, format or update a drive for which the checkbox in front of the drive symbol is checked.

NOTE: You may not remove, format or update a drive mounted in the computer within the system.

Click Exit on the screen or on the control panel to exit Storage Manager. Or, press the Exit button on the
control panel.

[Figure 7.42 Storage Manager]

7-67
 Operation Manual

■■ Refresh
Update the display of drives currently connected to the system.

NOTE: When using Storage Manager, you should click Refresh to update information.

■■ Eject / Remove
Disconnect the selected drive.

NOTE: Before unplugging a USB Flash memory drive, make sure to disconnect it by using the Eject /
Remove.

■■ Format
Initialize the selected drive. Under the Format window, you can initialize various settings. Click Start to
start initialization. Click Close to cancel.

NOTE: In the case of DVD+RW or DVD-RW, its free space can be displayed as ‘O bytes’ after formatting.
Because it is an error of WindowsTM, there is no problem to use that media.

7-68
 Chapter 7 Utilities

ECG
Press the F2 key, ECG, on the keyboard. The ECG setting menu appears on the soft menu screen. It shows an
image of the heart beat and appears in the menu for cardiac application only.
In Multi Image Mode such as Dual or Quad, ECG CINE can be used for each image.
CAUTION:
XXIf the ECG is less then 30Hz, the Heart Rate (HR) is not displayed.
XX
In CW Mode, when ECG is active, the error ratio of the Heart Rate (HR) should be within 2%.

[Figure 7.43 ECG]

[Figure 7.44 ECG - Softmenu]

7-69
 Operation Manual

Starting ECG and terminating

Use the [1] dial-button on the softmenu to turn on or off the ECG.

ECG Setup
■■ Sweep Speed
Set an ECG sweep speed. Select 60Hz, 120Hz, 180z, 240Hz, 300Hz or 360Hz by rotating dial button [1].

■■ Trigger
Set a trigger interval. Select a trigger interval value between 0 and 5 by rotating dial button [2]. 0
indicates Trigger off.

■■ Trigger Time
Select a time from between 0 and 1000 msecs by rotating dial button [3].

■■ Size
Set an ECG size. Select a size from between 50 and 200 by rotating dial button [3].

■■ Invert
Invert the ECG. Set dial button [3] to On or Off.

■■ Position
Set the location of the ECG. Select between 0 and 90 by rotating dial button [4]. The larger the selected
number, the higher the ECG is placed on the screen.

■■ Loop / 2D
Set an image area to display the ECG. Select Loop or 2D by rotating dial button [4].

■■ Gain
Set a gain value for the ECG. Select a gain value of between 10 and 100 by rotating dial button [5].

7-70
 Chapter 7 Utilities

■■ Auto Gain
When dial button [5] is pressed, the gain value for the ECG is set automatically.

■■ Exit
When dial button [6] is pressed, the content set for the ECG is saved and the screen switches to the
Diagnosis Mode screen.

7-71
 Operation Manual

Stress Echo (Optional)

The function of Stress Echo is to apply stress on the heart using exercise or drugs, and then observe and
diagnose changes in the heart.
NOTE:
XXStress Echo is an option for this product.
XX
It can only be used if the Cardiac Application is in place.

The procedure for using Stress Echo is as follows:

▶ When setting a new protocol: Set a protocol → Register the patient ID → Select the protocol and start
→ Acquire and specify images → Examine the images and diagnose → Create a Stress Echo report.

▶ When selecting an existing protocol: Register the patient ID → Select and start the protocol → Acquire
and specify images → Examine the images and diagnose → Create a Stress Echo report.

This manual describes the procedure on the assumption that a new protocol is used. For information on
registering a patient ID, see Chapter 3, ‘Starting Diagnosis’. For information on Stress Echo Report, see Chapter
5, ‘Measurement’.

Setting a Protocol
Before registering a patient ID, press the Protocol button on the control panel, or click the Template Editor
icon in the Protocol screen. The Protocol Template Editor screen appears. Modify an existing protocol or create
a new protocol.

■■ Creating a New Protocol Template

Press the [1] New Template dial-button on the soft menu.

■■ Modifying an Existing Protocol Template

Click the combo button in the top left of the screen, and select a protocol to use from the protocol list.

7-72
 Chapter 7 Utilities

Protocol Template Editor Screen

The Protocol Template Editor screen consists of the following items. Use these to edit a protocol.

[Figure 7.45 Protocol Template Editor]

■■ Protocol
When you press the combo button, the default protocols and other existing protocols are listed.

7-73
 Operation Manual

Default Protocols
Tips!
This product offers the following five protocols by default. The default protocols cannot be deleted or sent
to external storage media. Furthermore, you cannot modify a default protocol and save it with the same
name.

Protocol View Stage

Two Stage Exercise Stress
Three Stage Bicycle Stress
Four Stage Pharmacological
Stress (TBD)
PLAX, PSAX, A4C, A2C Rest, Peak
PLAX, PSAX, A4C, A2C Rest, Peak, Post
PLAX, PSAX, A4C, A2C Stage 1~4

MV-PW, TDI, LVOT-PW, TR, Baseline, Legs UP, 25W, 50W,

Diastolic Stress PSAX-BASE, PSAX-Mid, PSAX- 75W, 100W, 125W, REC2,
APEX, 4CH, 2CH, MR REC5, REC10

PLAX, PSAX, 4CH, APLAX, 2CH, Baseline, 5, 10, 20, 30, 40,
Dobutamin Stress
MV-PW, TDI, LVOT-PW, TR-CW atropine, recovery

■■ Stage

Set the stage. You can add or delete stages using the button.
To select from among the default stages, use the combo button. To directly enter a stage, use the
keyboard.

NOTE: You must create at least two stages, and you can add up to 10 stages.

■■ View

Set the view. You can add or delete views using the button.
To select from among the default views, use the combo button. To directly enter a view, use the
keyboard.

NOTE: You must create at least two views, and you can add up to 10 views.

7-74
 Chapter 7 Utilities

■■ Capture Unit
When you capture images by pressing the Acquire button on the control panel, select an image
capturing method.
▶▶Beat: Images are captured by heartbeat.

▶▶Time: Images are captured in units of a second.

▶▶Best Beat: After beats have been acquired, the best beat is selected and saved.

■■ Cycle / Time
When you capture images by pressing the Acquire button in the control panel, set an image capturing
interval. Select a number between 1 and 4 if you have selected Beat or Time for Capture Unit. Select 1
or 2 if you have selected Best Beat.

■■ Auto Assign
Once images are captured, they are automatically assigned to each stage and view.

Show Reference
„„
Displays reference image in dual mode when a stage image is acquired. Can only be used if the Auto
Assign checkbox has been selected.
With this feature enabled, the first stage is automatically set as the reference image.
Select each stage’s checkbox to acquire images from each stage using the same settings as the
reference image.

■■ Auto Next Stage

When an image is assigned to the last view of the current stage, the system automatically proceeds to
the next stage.

■■ Capture Method
When you capture images by pressing the Acquire button in the control panel, set the capturing range
of the video.
▶▶Prospective: The images are saved after the button is pressed.

▶▶Retrospective: The images are saved before the button is pressed.

7-75
 Operation Manual

Timer
„„
Specify onscreen timer display settings.

Show Protocol Timer: Displays the protocol’s time record (T1) on the screen.
XX

Show Stage Timer: Displays the current stage’s time record (T2) on the screen.
XX

■■ Export
When you press this button, the Protocol Export window appears. You can export and save protocols
that you have added to external storage media.

■■ Import
When you press this button, the Protocol Import window appears. You can import protocols from
external storage media.

Soft Menu
The Soft Menu of Protocol Template Editor consists of the following items:

[Figure 7.46 Protocol Template Editor – Soft Menu]

■■ New Template
Press the [1] dial-button. A new protocol is created.

■■ Save
Press the [2] dial-button. Save the new protocol. You cannot save a default protocol after changing it.

■■ Save As
Press the [3] dial-button. Save the protocol with a different name.

7-76
 Chapter 7 Utilities

■■ Delete
Press the [4] dial-button. The currently selected protocol is deleted and a new protocol template
appears. This cannot be used when a default protocol is selected.

■■ Close
Press the [6] dial-button. The Protocol Template Editor screen is closed.

7-77
 Operation Manual

Starting a Protocol And Capturing Images

Register a patient ID and press the Protocol button on the control panel. The Protocol screen appears. Select
a protocol to start a test, and examine the captured Stress Echo image.

■■ Selecting a protocol
Press the combo button at top of the screen, and select a protocol from the protocol list.

■■ Starting a protocol
Press the [1] Begin Protocol dial-button on the soft menu. The screen changes to diagnosis mode.
After the protocol has started, the button name is changed to [1] End Protocol.

■■ Capturing Stress Echo images

Press the Acquire button on the control panel to capture images for each view and stage. A matrix of
captured Stress Echo images is displayed in the left of the screen.

[Figure 7.47 Matrix]

To return to the Protocol screen while capturing an image, press the Protocol button.
XX

To change a stage and acquire images, use one of the following methods:
XX

1. Press the Pointer button on the control panel. Use the pointer to select the next stage.

2. Use the keyboard's  and  keys.

3. Press the [5] Next Stage dial-button on the soft menu in the Protocol screen.

7-78
 Chapter 7 Utilities

Auto Assign and Auto Next Stage

Tips! If Auto Assign or Auto Next Stage has been set, Stress Echo images are automatically assigned when
they are captured. The matrix is displayed as shown below.

[Figure 7.48 Matrix – Auto Assign, Auto Next Stage]

With Auto Assign enabled, you can use the keyboard’s arrow keys to change the stage and view.

7-79
 Operation Manual

Show Reference
Tips! If Show Reference has been selected in the Protocol Template Editor screen, Protocol Screen scan
is performed alongside the reference image. Show Reference is a feature that sets the first stage as the
reference image and compares subsequent scans under identical conditions. Can only be used if the Auto
Assign checkbox has been selected.

Enabling this feature activates Dual mode. The reference image is shown on the left. The current
image is shown on the right side of the screen and can be acquired under the same conditions as
the reference image.
Applied reference image conditions are as follows:
XX
Image Depth
XX
Width
XX
Dynamic Range
XX
2D Mode Settings (Harmonic, etc.)
XX
SRF Index
XX
Post-Processing (Gray map)
XX
Gain (2D, C)
XX
Read Zoom
Remember the following while using the Show Reference feature:
XX
Pressing the control panel’s Caliper, Calculator, or Tracer buttons will activate single mode.
Once the concerned feature has been used, the system returns to Dual mode.
XX
Pressing the Freeze button activates Single mode. Pressing the Acquire button saves the image
and returns the system to Dual mode.
XX
The keyboard’s F6 key, Single/Dual/Quad, and F7 key, Select Active Window, keys cannot be
used.

[Figure 7.49 Show Reference]

7-80
 Chapter 7 Utilities

Best Beat Selection

Tips!
When you select Best Beat for Capture Unit and press the Acquire button, a screen appears
for selecting the best beat. Depending on the number of acquired beats, the screen is displayed
in single, dual, or quad mode. However, images containing a loop cannot be used for best beat
selection.

[Figure 7.50 Best Beat Selection]

To select the best beat, choose an image with pointer and press the [5] Accept dial-button on the
soft menu. To cancel it, press the [6] Cancel dial-button.

■■ Ending a protocol
Press the [1] End Protocol dial-button on the soft menu.

7-81
 Operation Manual

Protocol Screen
The Protocol screen consists of the following items.

1
2

3
4

5 6

[Figure 7.51 Protocol Screen]

① Protocol: When you press the combo button, the protocols are listed. Select a protocol to use.

NOTE: Once a protocol is started, you cannot change it.

② Stage: When you press the combo button, stages are listed. Select a stage to use. The thumbnail list
shows the images stored in the selected stage.

7-82
 Chapter 7 Utilities

Tips! The stage that is currently acquiring images is displayed with a green outline in the stage area.

③ Stress Echo Image Area: The Stress Echo image is displayed in line with the view along the horizontal
axis and the stage along the vertical axis. When you select a Stress Echo image, an orange outline is
displayed and double-clicking it enlarges the image. Double-clicking the enlarged image restores it
to its original size.

④ Thumbnail list: The captured Stress Echo images are listed by stage. Images that already have been
assigned to the Stress Echo image area are not displayed in the thumbnail list.

⑤ Icon list: The functions that can be used in the Protocol screen are displayed as icons.

⑥ Stress Echo Information Area: The settings for Stress Echo are displayed.

Soft Menu
The soft menu of the Protocol screen consists of the following items:

[Figure 7.52 Protocol Screen]

■■ Begin Protocol / End Protocol

Press the [1] dial-button. The protocol is either started or ended.

NOTE: A protocol cannot be started again once it is ended.

■■ Pause Protocol / Resume Protocol

Press the [2] dial-button. The protocol is either paused or resumed.

■■ Review
Pressing [3] dial-button switches to the Stress Echo Review screen.

7-83
 Operation Manual

■■ Assign
The [4] dial-button is used to set this on and off. When this is set to On, the stage selected in Stage is
outlined in yellow. The Stress Echo images in the Thumbnail list are assigned appropriately to each view
and stage. This cannot be used once the protocol is ended.

■■ Change View
The [5] dial-button is used to select a view. This does not appear in the soft menu when Auto Assign or
Auto Next Stage is not enabled.

■■ Next Stage
Press the [5] dial-button to change to the next stage. The stage that is currently capturing an image is
displayed with a green outline in the stage area in the left of the screen.

■■ Thumb Scroll
This appears in the soft menu only if four or more images have been captured. Press the [6] dial-button
to change the page of the thumbnail list.

Icon List

[Figure 7.53 Icon List]

① Assign: Click the icon to set on/off. When this is set to On, the stage selected in Stage is outlined in
yellow. The Stress Echo images in the Thumbnail list are appropriately assigned to each view and
stage. This cannot be used after the protocol is ended.
② Release: Click the icon to set on/off. When this is set to On, the images selected in the Stress Echo
Area are returned to the Thumbnail list. This cannot be used after the protocol is ended.
③ Select All: All the images in the Stress Echo Image Area are selected.
④ Unselect All: All image selections are released.
⑤ Template Editor: Returns to the Protocol Template Editor screen.
⑥ Exit: Closes the Protocol screen.

7-84
 Chapter 7 Utilities

Image Review
After selecting a Stress Echo image in the Protocol screen, press the [3] Review dial-button on the soft menu.
The Stress Echo Review screen appears. Here you can review the selected image, perform measurements and
other tasks.

Stress Echo Review Screen

① Stress Echo Image Area: The Stress Echo images selected in the Protocol screen are displayed. You
can review up to four Stress Echo images in one screen. At the top of each image, the stage and view
names as well as Protocol Timer (T1) and Stage Timer (T2) are displayed.
② Image Information Area: The probe type, diagnosis area, frame rate, depth, frequency, TI, image saved
time, matrix, and other information about the image are displayed.
③ WMS Diagram Area: Four WMS diagrams are displayed. WMS stands for Wall Motion Scoring. At the
top of each diagram is a combo button for selecting a stage. At the bottom of each diagram, the WMSI
value and the value selected on the score menu are displayed.

[Figure 7.54 Stress Echo Review]

7-85
 Operation Manual

NOTE: You can perform measurements using the Caliper and Calculator buttons. Pressing the
Calculator button displays the heart measurement menu, and the current stage is displayed in the menu
subject line.

WMS

Four WMS diagrams are displayed. Each diagram is divided into segments indicated with area numbers
between 1 and 16. Enter WMS after selecting a stage.
▶ PLAX: Parasternal Long Axis
▶PSAX: Parasternal Short Axis
▶A4C: Apical Four Chamber
▶A2C: Apical Two Chamber

PLAX PSAX A4C A2C

[Figure 7.55 WMS Diagram]

Left Ventricular Segment Area Number

Basal Anterior Septum 1

Basal Anterior 2
Basal Lateral 3
Basal Posterior 4
Basal Inferior 5
Basal Septum 6
Mid Anterior Septum 7
Mid Anterior 8
Mid Lateral 9
Mid Posterior 10
Mid Inferior 11
Mid Septum 12

7-86
 Chapter 7 Utilities

Left Ventricular Segment Area Number

Apical Septum 13
Apical Anterior 14
Apical Lateral 15
Apical Inferior 16

[Table 7.1 Segments and Area Numbers]

■■ Entering WMS
1. Select a segment for which to enter WMS using the trackball and the Set button. The Score menu
appears.
2. Select a value from the menu. The segment color changes and WMS is displayed.
Or
1. Select a desired value on the score menu at the bottom of the screen.
2. Place the pointer in the segment in which to enter a value and press the Set button. The segment
color changes and WMS is displayed.

When WMS is entered in a segment, the same score is applied to all segments that have the same area
Tips!
number.

Score Menu
Tips!
This product supports three score menus. Select which score menus to use under Setup >
Measure Setup > Cardiac > WMS Level Select.

<4 Level> <5 Level> <7 Level>

[Figure 7.56 Score Menu]

7-87
 Operation Manual

■■ Deleting WMS
To delete an entered value, click N-NotScored on the Score menu and click the segment to delete. The
color of the selected segment is reset.

Tips! To delete all WMS’s entered in the current stage, press the [1] Delete WMS dial-button on the soft menu.

■■ WMSI
This is the average of the WMS’s entered in the current stage. WMSI stands for Wall Motion Scoring
Index.

Soft Menu

[Figure 7.57 Stress Echo Review – Soft Menu]

■■ Delete WMS
Press the [1] dial-button. All WMS’s entered in the current stage are deleted.

■■ Run / Stop
Press the [2] dial-button. All the cine images in the Stress Echo Image Area are played or stopped
simultaneously.

■■ Stage Scroll
Turn the dial-button to change stages. This appears in the soft menu only when 2 or more stages are
used.

■■ Strain
Press the dial-button [3]. The Strain Image function can be used. The soft menu will appear only when
the conditions of using the Strain Image function are met.

7-88
 Chapter 7 Utilities

■■ Selection Mode
Selection Mode sets the display mode for selecting images using the matrix. You can turn the dial
button [4] on the soft menu to select one from among Manual, 1 X 2, 2 X 1, 2 X 2, 1 X 4, and 4 X 1. The
selected stage and view are displayed in the image information area.
▶▶mXn: When you select an image in the matrix, m stages below the selected image and n views to
the left of the selected image are selected. The selected images are automatically displayed in the
screen.
▶▶Manual: You can manually select images to be displayed from the matrix. When you select an
image, its number is displayed in yellow. When you press the [4] Review dial-button on the soft
menu, the selected images are displayed in number order.

■■ Change Play
You can turn the [5] dial-button to choose the play mode for cine images to Acquired, R-R, or Systole
Only.

[Figure 7.58 Play Mode]

■■ Change Sync
You can turn the [6] dial-button to choose the synchronization mode for cine images to Short, Long, or
End to End.
▶▶Short: Among the four cine images, the shortest image is used as the basis for synchronization.

▶▶Long: Among the four cine images, the longest image is used as the basis for synchronization.

▶▶End to End: Four cine images are synchronized from the beginning to the end.

■■ Protocol Screen
Press the [6] dial-button. The Stress Echo Review screen is closed and the Protocol screen appears.

NOTE: For details on Stress Echo Report, see Chapter 5, ‘Measurements’.

7-89
 Operation Manual

Strain Image (optional)

The Strain Image function shows heart motion quantitatively using a motion vector, and diagnoses heart
dyssynchrony, based on the quantitative expression.

NOTE:
The Strain Image function can be used only when the following conditions are met.
XX Diagnosis item: Cardiac
XX
Diagnosis Modes: 2D (Freeze state)
XX
ECG: On

Take the following steps to use the Strain Image function.

Select an image à Set the Quantification Type à Start Quantification

■■ Select an image
Select an image to analyze, using the trackball and the Set button.

Select an image by referring to the following.

Tips! Select an image that shows the entire wall of heart.
XX
There should be an R-Peak before/after the selected image, and there should be more than 70 CINE
frames between the previous R-Peak and last image.

----------- R -----------Selected image------ R ----------------------------------------- R ---------------------------

[Figure 7.59 R-Peak]

■■ Select a Quantification Type

Turn the soft menu dial-button [1] and select a Quantification Type. Select one of Strain, Auto EF, or
TMAD.

■■ Start Quantification
Press the soft menu dial-button [1]. The selected Quantification Type will be executed.

NOTE: If the image is not properly selected, the Quantification screen will not appear.

7-90
 Chapter 7 Utilities

Strain
Select Strain as the soft menu [1] Quant. Type Type and press the dial-button. The Strain screen will appear.

Strain will be executed in the following order.

Select an image à Set an outline à Calculate the Strain data à Analyze the result

Select an image
Select an image and chamber information.
The Strain screen is composed as follows.
 Thumbnail list: The saved images will be displayed in a preview format.
‚ Image area: The images selected from the Thumbnail list will be displayed.
ƒ Operation Guide: The method of using the Strain function will be displayed on the screen. Click Show/
Hide to select the use status.

3
2

[Figure 7.60 Image selection screen]

7-91
 Operation Manual

■■ Select an image
Three images should be selected. Double click the image to use with the trackball and the Set button
on the control panel. Or, select an image and click the pointer on the preferred image area.

NOTE:
XXIf the requirement to use the Strain Image function (Cardiac, 2D mode, ECG On) cannot be satisfied, the
concerned item will be displayed in red at the right upper side of the image.
XX
If less than or equal to 2 images are selected, you cannot move to the next stage even if you press the
soft menu dial-button [4] Next.

■■ Select the Cine position

Sets the Cine of each image that appears on the image area. Use the soft menu [1] 1 Pos ~ [3] 3 Pos
dial-button.

■■ Select the Chamber information

Use the combo box button located at the left upper side of each image. Select one from 2ch, 3ch, 4ch,
Apex short, Mid short, or Basal short.

NOTE:
XXTo use multi-analysis, 2ch, 3ch, and 4ch should be selected.
XX
If the saved Strain data is available, the channel will be set automatically.

■■ Move to the next step

Press the soft menu dial-button [5] Next.

NOTE: If the chamber information is not assigned, you cannot move to the next stage even though you
press the soft menu dial-button [4] Next.

■■ Exit Strain
Press the soft menu dial-button [6] Close.

[Figure 7.61 Strain screen soft menu]

7-92
 Chapter 7 Utilities

Outline setting and calculation

Press the soft menu dial-button [5] Next from the Strain screen. The outline setting screen will appear.
The outline will be drawn around the image in the Outline Setting screen, and related calculation is
performed. If the Strain data is available when an image is selected, the green border line will be drawn.
Otherwise, the gray border line will be drawn.
The operation guide will appear at the left side of the screen. Click Show/Hide to select the use status.

[Figure 7.62 Outline setting screen]

■■ Drawing an outline
Use the button located at the upper left side of each image. The dotted yellow border line will be drawn
around the image while the outline is being drawn.
▶▶Draw contour: Appears on the image that has no strain data. Press the button and specify points
to draw an outline, using the trackball and the Set button on the control panel.
▶▶Recontour: Appears on the image that strain data. To redraw On the outline, press the button and
specify points to draw an outline, using the trackball and the Set button on the control panel.

NOTE:
XXMore than five points should be specified. If less than five points are specified and Confirm is pressed,
‘Abnormal Contour!!’ will appear. The message will appear and the outline will be removed.
XX
The method of drawing an outline is different, depending on the chamber setting information.

7-93
 Operation Manual

■■ Create and cancel an outline

Specify the points and click Confirm to create an outline. The Epicardial line will be displayed to the
10mm outside of the created outline. Or, click Cancel to cancel and draw again.

■■ Modify an outline
The yellow border line will be displayed when the cursor is moved close to the point to modify. Click the
Set button on the control panel and change the position of the point using the trackball. The outline
will be modified to the modified points when the Set button is clicked again.

■■ Calculate the Strain data

Click Calculate on the image. When calculation is completed, the green border line will be displayed
around the image.

Strain result
Click Multi Analysis or Single Analysis on the screen.

Multi Analysis will be activated if the image is 2ch, 3ch, or 4ch. Otherwise, only Single Analysis
can be used.

The Strain result screen is composed as follows.

 Menu: The data screen display method or item related to data saving will be displayed. For multi
analysis, EF (2ch) and EF (4ch) will be displayed.
‚ Image area: The outlined image will be displayed.
ƒ Bull’s eye: Information on several cross sections of the heart (2Ch, 3Ch, 4Ch) will be displayed at the
same time. For single analysis, the information on the selected image will be displayed.

7-94
 Chapter 7 Utilities

[Figure 7.63 Strain result screen]

[Figure 7.64 Strain result screen soft menu]

■■ Run/Stop
Press the soft menu dial-button [1] to run or stop image play.

Stop state
Tips!
In stop state, numeric value will be displayed automatically on the Bull’s eye. Numeric value is a kind of
strain data based on the color bar. Select the range to review the strain data from following;

XX
Current: Displays the strain data of current bar position.
XX
R-R Interval: Displays the starain data of R-R interval.
XX
Selected Interval: Displays the starain data of the selected interval.

■■ Position
Turn the soft menu dial-button [2] to set the scope of playing the image.

7-95
 Operation Manual

■■ Image display
Sets the image display method.
▶▶Image only: Only the image will be displayed.

▶▶Image and 6 Graph: The image and segmental graph will be displayed.

▶▶Image and M: The image and M mode will be displayed.

▶▶Image and Graph: The image and graph will be displayed.

Image only
Tips!
In ‘Image only’, click Full data button on the left upper side of image to display all graph and M
mode. If you change the range on M mode, it will be displayed as pink dot line on the graph.
To back to ‘Image only’, click 3 Plane button.

Image Panning
Tips!
You can move the image with trackball. Click the right / left side of the image, move it rightward /
leftward. It is useful if the image is hidden by a graph.
However, it is not available in ‘Image only’.

▶▶Alpha blend: Display the motions of the contour line.

▶▶Trajectory: Sample and display some speckles.

▶▶Endo + epicardial: Display the vector direction, speed, strain, and moving position of the inner and
outer walls.

■■ Bull’s eye display

Sets the bull’s eye display method. Select the Longitudinal or Radial tab and set the item.
▶▶S: Refers to “Strain”.

▶▶SR: Refers to “Strain Rate”.

▶▶V: Refers to “Velocity”.

▶▶D: Refers to “Displacement”.

▶▶S Tpk: Refers to “Strain Time to Pick”.

▶▶Thick Line: If the checkbox is selected, the border lines of each segment will be displayed in thick
line.
▶▶View numeric data: If the checkbox is selected, numeric data will be displayed on the Bull’s eye.
Howeverm when you select the softmenu [1] Stop, numeric data is always displayed.

7-96
 Chapter 7 Utilities

■■ Store / Save
The Save / Store window will appear. Save the selected data in hard disc of the system. You can select
one from following;
▶▶Strain

▶▶Screen Capture and AVI

▶▶Strain Data + Screen Capture and AVI

▶▶Cancel

■■ Export to excel
Saves the result and representative image in an Excel file format. Available only when the USB flash
memory is connected.

■■ Export to AVI
The result will be saved in an AVI format. Available only when the USB flash memory is connected.

■■ Reporting & Exit

The Confirmation window will appear. Click Close to exit without saving the measurement value. To
exit after saving the measurement value, click the Close & confirmation button. To back to the Strain
result screen, click the Cancel button.

Saving the Strain data & AVI file

Tips!
Click the Acquire button on the control panel to save the Strain data. The image with the “Strain"
data will be displayed as S in the Thumbnail list.
Also, place the pointer on the AVI file in the thumbnail list to play the image automatically.

7-97
 Operation Manual

Auto EF
Select Auto EF in the soft menu [1] Quant. Type and press the dial-button.

NOTE: Available in Single mode only.

Outline setting and calculation

[Figure 7.65 Outline setting screen]

■■ Drawing an outline
Specify a point using the trackball and the Set button on the control panel. Specify the area near to the
point again to cancel the point specified last.

■■ Calculating the Auto EF data

Press the soft menu dial-button [5] Calculation. The result screen will appear.

7-98
 Chapter 7 Utilities

■■ Exit
Press the soft menu dial-button [6] Close.

[Figure 7.66 Outline setting – Soft menu]

Auto EF results

1 2

[Figure 7.67 Auto EF results screen]

The Auto EF results screen is composed as follows.

 End Diastolic: The related information will be displayed in green.

‚ End Systolic: The related information will be displayed in yellow.
ƒ Calculation result: Stroke Volume (SV) and Ejection Fraction (EF) will be displayed.

7-99
 Operation Manual

[Figure 7.68 Auto EF – Soft menu]

If the position of the Cine frame is changed, the calculation results will be changed accordingly. To change
the frame position, select the position using the soft menu dial-button [4] ED or [5] ES. To reset the
position of the changed frame, use Reset Systolic or Reset Diastolic on the screen.

7-100
 Chapter 7 Utilities

TMAD
Select TMAD in the soft menu [1] Quant. Type and press the dial-button. TMAD stands for Tissue Motion
Annulus Displacement, which is the function that examines the heart function by analyzing displacement of
Annulus movement.

NOTE: Available in Single mode only.

Point setting
The operation guide will appear at the left side of the screen.

[Figure 7.69 Point setting screen]

■■ Set the point

Specify five points using the trackball or the Set button on the control panel. Select the point on the
septal direction first, followed by apex and lateral.
When points are specified, the line connecting each point will be displayed.

7-101
 Operation Manual

■■ Modify the point

Put the cursor on points and change their positions by using the trackball while pressing the Set
button.

■■ View the TMAD data

Press the soft menu dial-button [5] Review.

■■ Exit
Press the soft menu dial-button [6] Close.

[Figure 7.70 Outline setting – Soft menu]

TMAD result

[Figure 7.71 TMAD result screen]

7-102
 Chapter 7 Utilities

The TMAD result screen is composed as follows.

 Measurement results and menu: The menu regarding the measurement results, Cine adjustment, and
saving will be displayed.
‚ Image area: The image specified with the points will be displayed.
ƒ Graph: ECG and the displacement by time graph will be displayed.

■■ Measurement Results
The TMAD point, displacement and variation of the intermediate values will be displayed on the screen.
The color used to display the measurement results will match the color of each point.

■■ Export to excel
Saves the result and representative image in an Excel file format. Available only when the USB flash
memory is connected.

■■ Export to AVI
The result will be saved in an AVI format. Available only when the USB flash memory is connected.

■■ Displacement line
Shows the displacement line on the image.

■■ Cine Control
Sets the play speed of the Cine image.

■■ Reporting & Exit

The Confirmation this measure item window will appear. If Close with confirmation is clicked, the
measurement value will be saved before exit. If Close is clicked, the screen will be closed without saving
the measurement value.

■■ ECG graph
Shows the current position.

■■ Displacement graph
Shows displacement by time. Select the graph line to review from the left checkbox.
The color used to display the graph line will be same with the color of each point. The vertical dotted
lines will show the current position.

7-103
 Operation Manual

■■ Speed
Turn the soft menu dial-button [1] to set the play speed to Slow, Normal or Fast.

■■ Run / Stop
Turn the soft menu dial-button [1] to Run or Stop the image play.

■■ Position
Turn the soft menu dial-button [2] to set the scope of playing the image.

[Figure 7.72 TMAD – Soft menu]

7-104
Chapter 8
Maintenance

‹‹Operating Environment...................................8-3

‹‹System Maintenance........................................8-4
Cleaning and disinfections ..................................................8-4
Fuse Replacement....................................................................8-6
Cleaning Air Filters...................................................................8-7
Accuracy Check.........................................................................8-7

‹‹Data Maintenance...........................................8-8
User Setting Back up...............................................................8-8
Patient information Back-up................................................8-8
Software.......................................................................................8-8
 Chapter 8 Maintenance

Operating Environment
When installing the console, please consider the following:

CAUTION: Placing the system near generators, X-Ray machines or broadcast cables may result in
screen noise and abnormal visual images. Sharing the power source with other electrical devices
may also induce noise.

■ Avoid humidity.

■ Avoid direct sunlight.

■ Avoid places with extreme temperature variations.

■ Optimal conditions for the system are temperatures of 10 ~ 35° C and humidity of 30 ~ 75%.

■ Avoid heat sources.

■ Avoid dusty and unventilated areas.

■ Avoid places where the system is likely to be exposed to vibration or impacts.

■ Avoid places where the system is likely to be exposed to chemical substances or gases.

8-3
 Operation Manual

System Maintenance
NOTE: The expected service life of this equipment is 7 years.

Cleaning and disinfections

Using inappropriate detergent or disinfectant may damage the product. Please read the following carefully.

WARNING:
XX
Turn off the system and disconnect the system power cord from the wall outlet. Otherwise, it
may result in electric shock or fire.
XX
Always use protective eyewear and gloves when cleaning and disinfecting the equipment.

Cleaning
CAUTION:
XX
Do not use a spray directly on the product exterior. It may cause cracks in the appliance, or the
color to deteriorate.
XX
Do not use chemical substances such as wax, benzene, alcohol, thinner, mosquito repellant,
deodorant, lubricant or detergent.

■ Console
Use a soft cloth lightly dampened in a mild soap or detergent solution to clean exterior surfaces on the
system.

■ Cleaning Monitor
Wipe the LCD surface with a soft dry cloth. When the LCD panel has dirt on it, wipe it 2 - 3 times or more
in one direction.

NOTE: For information on cleaning and disinfection of the probe, please refer to Chapter 9 “Probes.”

8-4
 Chapter 8 Maintenance

Disinfections

NOTE: Use only recommended disinfectants on system surfaces.

A disinfectant qualified by the FDA 510(k) process is recommended. The following disinfectants are
recommended because of both their biological effectiveness (as qualified through the FDA 510(k) process)
and their chemical compatibility with Samsung Medison ultrasound products.

Solutions Country Type Active ingredient FDA 510(k)

Cidex USA Liquid Gluteraldehyde K934434

Cidex Plus USA Liquid Gluteraldehyde K923744

1. Turn off the system and disconnect the system power cord from the wall outlet.
2. Mix the disinfection solution compatible with your system according to label instructions for solution
strength.
3. Wipe the system surfaces with the disinfectant solution, following the disinfectant label instructions
for wipe durations, solution strength, and disinfectant contact duration.
4. Air dry or towel dry with a sterile cloth according to the instructions on the disinfectant label.

8-5
 Operation Manual

Fuse Replacement
The power protection fuse protects the product from excess current. If the power monitoring protection
circuit detects excess current, it shuts off the current to the equipment in order to prevent overheating and to
restrict the ultrasound power output.
If the fuse blows, replace it as shown below.

DANGER: To avoid risk of electric shock, always disconnect the plug from the system prior to fuse
replacement.

1 AC Power Receptacle

Fuse 2

[Figure 8.1 Fuse replacement]

1. Turn off the system and disconnect the system power cord from the wall outlet. (See )
2. Press the fuse holder in the direction of the arrow and pull it out. (See )
3. Remove the old fuse and replace it with a new one.
4. After installing the new fuse, connect the plug to the system.

Fuse information is shown in the following table.

Input Ratings Fuse Ratings Maker Order No.

100-120VAC 10AH/250V Orisel 55T210000

200-240VAC 10A/H250V Orisel 55T210000

8-6
 Chapter 8 Maintenance

Cleaning Air Filters

The air filters minimize the indraft of dust. Clean the air filter to ensure that a clogged filter does not cause the
system to overheat and reduce the noise and the system performance.
It is recommended the air filters be cleaned once every three months.

CAUTION: Be sure to lock the brakes on the front wheels before cleaning the air filters to avoid
injury by any unexpected movement of the product.

1. Pull the filter under the front of the console to away from the product.
2. Shake the filter to remove the dust and wash in a mild soapy solution.
3. Rinse and air dry or dry with a cloth.
4. Slide the filter back into the product.

NOTE: Allow the wet filter to dry thoroughly before installing. The wet filter can cause the
malfunction.

Accuracy Check
NOTE: The user must ensure that safety inspections are performed every 2 years according to the
requirements of safety standard EN 60601-1. Only trained persons are allowed to perform these
safety inspections.

The product’s maintenance status may affect the measurements obtained using the product. The product
should be maintained in an optimal state to ensure reliable measurements.
To ensure optimal operation of the product, perform an accuracy check every year. The equations and table
related to measurement accuracy are included in “Chapter 5 Measurements” in this manual.

8-7
 Operation Manual

Data Maintenance
CAUTION: You may lose information files on user settings or patients, because of shock on the
product or internal error. Thus, back-up on a regular basis.

User Setting Back up

Always keep a backup copy of all information related to the user settings in case of data loss. Clients
cannot back-up the user settings of the product. Please contact the Samsung Medison Customer Service
Department to attain support for back-up.

Patient information Back-up

The SonoView program can be used for backing up patient’s basic information and scanned images. The user
can choose to save the data, and the data is also saved in the system by default. If the system needs to be
reinstalled due to product failure, etc., the Samsung Medison customer support staff will restore the patient’s
basic information and scanned images that are saved in the system. For more information on this, see ‘Chapter
6 Image Management’.

Software
The product software may be updated to enhance performance. The user cannot make any changes to the
software. Please contact the Samsung Medison customer support for help in software changes.

CAUTION: Minor software updates may be carried out without the prior notice from the
manufacturer.

Should errors occur in the operating system (Windows™), and should you desire to upgrade the operating
system, please follow the instructions of the operating system manufacturer.

8-8
Chapter 9
Probes

‹‹Probes.................................................................9-3
Ultrasound transmission Gel................................................9-7
Sheaths.........................................................................................9-8
Probe Precautions....................................................................9-9
Cleaning and Disinfecting the Probe..............................9-11
MPTEE Probe (Optional).......................................................9-18
 Chapter 9 Probes

Probes
The probe is a device that sends and receives ultrasound for acquiring image data. It is also called a
Transducer or Scanhead.

The system limits patient contact temperature to 43 degrees Celsius, and acoustic output values to their
respective U.S. FDA limits. A power protection fuse circuit protects against over-current conditions. If the
power monitor protection circuit senses an over-current condition, then the drive current to the probe is shut
off immediately, preventing overheating of the probe surfaces and limiting acoustic output. Validation of the
power protection fuse circuit is performed under normal system operation. For invasive probes, additional
protections are designed to keep patient contact surface temperature under 43 degrees Celsius in the event
of a single fault failure.

Probe List
The ultrasound image scanner uses probes to obtain graphic data of the human body and then displays it
on the screen. Always use application-specific probes in order to obtain the best quality images. It is also
important to configure the probe with the best settings for the particular organ being scanned.

■ Probe Application and Preset

Probes, applications and settings available for this product are as follows:

Probe Application Preset

Abdomen General, Aorta, Renal

C1-4EC
OB Fetal Echo
Abdomen General, Aorta, Renal
C2-6IC
OB Fetal Echo
Gynecology Adnexa, Uterus
EV4-9/10ED
OB 1st Trimester
L3-8 Vascular Arterial, Carotid, Venous
Smallparts Testicle, Thyroid
L5-13IS
Vascular Arterial, Carotid, Venous

9-3
 Operation Manual

Probe Application Preset

Abdomen General, Aorta, Renal

Cardiac Adult Echo, Aorticarch, Ped Echo
P2-4BA
Contrast LVO
TCD General
Abdomen General, Aorta, Renal
P3-8CA Cardiac Adult Echo, Aorticarch, Ped Echo
Contrast LVO
Cardiac Aorticarch, Ped Echo
P4-12
Pediatric Abdomen, Neo head
MPT3-7 Cardiac Adult Echo
MMPT3-7 Cardiac Adult Echo
CW2.0 Cardiac Adult Echo
CW4.0 Cardiac Adult Echo, Ped Echo

NOTE:
XX
Besides, user can have or select own preset between User1-5.
XX
Refer to ‘Chapter3. Starting Diagnosis’ for how to set probe and its preset.

■ Function list
Some functions depend on probe and its application. See following table.

Probe Application Q Scan Har PI PPI TDI CM CFR ECG Biopsy

Abdomen ● ● ● x x x x x x
C1-4EC
OB ● ● ● x x x x x x
Abdomen ● ● ● x x x x x x
C2-6IC
OB ● ● ● x x x x x x
Gynecology ● x x x x x x x x
EV4-9/10ED
OB ● x x x x x x x x
L3-8 Vascular ● ● x x x x x ● x
Smallparts ● ● x x x x x x x
L5-13IS
Vascular ● ● x x x x x ● x

9-4
 Chapter 9 Probes

Probe Application Q Scan Har PI PPI TDI CM CFR ECG Biopsy

Abdomen ● ● ● x x x x x x
Cardiac ● ● ● x ● ● x ● x
P2-4BA
Contrast ● ● ● x ● ● x ● x
TCD ● ● ● x x x x x x
Abdomen ● ● ● x x x x x x
P3-8CA Cardiac ● ● ● x ● ● x ● x
Contrast ● ● ● x x x x ● x
Pediatric ● ● ● x ● ● x ● x
P4-12
Cardiac ● ● ● x x x x x x
MPT3-7 Cardiac ● ● ● x ● ● x ● x
MMPT3-7 Cardiac ● ● ● x ● ● x ● x
CW2.0 Cardiac x x x x x x x ● x
CW4.0 Cardiac x x x x x x x ● x

NOTE:
XX
Q Scan: Quick Scan XX
TDI: Tissue Doppler Imaging
XX
Har: Harmonic imaging XX
CM: Color M mode
XX
PI: PuIse Inversion XX
ECG: Electro Cardio Graph
XX
PPI: Power Pulse Inversion XX
CFR: Color Frame Rate

9-5
 Operation Manual

Thermal Index (TI) Tables

TI values displayed on the screen title bar can change depending on probes and applications. EKO 7 decides au-
tomatically which TI value will be displayed out of TIs, TIb, and TIc. The TI values are as follows,

Applications

Gynecology
Small Parts
Obstetrics
Abdomen

Pediatric

Contrast
Vascular

Cardiac
Probes

TCD

OB
C1-4EC TIs TIb

C2-6IC TIs TIb

EV4-9/10ED TIb TIs

L3-8 TIs

L5-13IS TIs TIs

P2-4BA TIs TIs TIs TIs

P3-8CA TIs TIs TIs TIs

P4-12 TIs TIs

MPT3-7 TIs

MMPT3-7 TIs

CW2.0 TIs

CW4.0 TIs

9-6
 Chapter 9 Probes

Ultrasound transmission Gel

Using an inappropriate ultrasound gel may damage the probe. For proper transmission of the acoustic beam,
only use ultrasound transmission gel only approved by Samsung Medison.

WARNING:
XX
Do not use mineral oil, oil-based solutions, or other non-approved material as they may cause
damage to the probe.
XX
Do not use gels that contain any of the following agents:
−− Acetone
−− Methanol
−− Denatured Ethyl Alcohol
−− Mineral Oil
−− Iodine
−− Lanolin
−− Any lotions or gels containing perfume

9-7
 Operation Manual

Sheaths
Sheaths are recommended for clinical applications of an invasive nature, including intraoperative, transrectal,
transvaginal, and biopsy procedures.

Samsung Medison does not supply sheaths so that you should purchase appropriate ones on your own.

WARNING:
XX
Always keep sheaths in a sterile state.
XX
Sheaths are disposable. Do not reuse them.
XX
If sheaths are torn or soiled after use, clean and disinfect the probe.
XX
In neurosurgical applications, a disinfected probe must be used with sterile gel and a sterile
pyrogen-free sheath.
XX
If the sterile sheath becomes compromised during neurosurgical applica-tions involving a
patient with Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease, the probe cannot be successfully sterilized by any
disinfection method.
XX
Some sheaths contain natural rubber latex and talc, which can cause allergic reactions in some
individuals. Please refer to the FDA Medical Alert released on March 29, 1991.

Installing the Sheath

1. Put on sterile gloves. Unpack the sheath and fill it with acoustic coupling gel.
2. Insert the probe into the sheath and pull the latex tip to cover the probe completely. If possible, cover
the probe cable as well.
3. Ensure that there is no air bubble within the ultrasound gel. If necessary, secure the sheath to the probe
and the probe cable.
4. Dispose of the sheath after use.

9-8
 Chapter 9 Probes

Probe Precautions
CAUTION:
XX
Do not apply mechanical shock to the probe.
XX
Do not place the probe cable on the floor where the cable can be run over by equipment
wheels, etc. Do not apply excessive force to bend or pull the cable.
XX
Do not immerse the probe into any inappropriate substances such as alcohol, bleach,
ammonium chloride, and hydrogen peroxide.

Do not expose the probe to temperatures of +50°C or higher.The probe can easily be damaged by improper
use or by contacting certain chemical substances. Always follow the instructions in the user manual to
inspect the probe cable, case and lens before and after each use.

Check for cracks, broken parts, leaks and sharp edges. If there is any damage, immediately stop using the
probe and contact the Samsung Medison Customer Support Department. Using damaged probes may result
in electric shocks and other hazards to the patients and/or users.

Use and Infection Control of the Probe

WARNING: No neurosurgical treatments or examinations should be carried out on a patient with
Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease (critical brain disease caused by virus). If the probe has been used on such
a patient, it cannot be sterilized by any method whatsoever.

CAUTION: Sufficient washing and disinfecting must be carried out for preventing infection. This
is the responsibility of the user who manages and maintains the disinfection procedures for the
equipment. Always use legally approved detergents.

The ultrasonographic image scanner uses ultrasound, and it makes direct contact with the patient when
in use. Depending on the types of examinations, such contact can be made to a wide variety of locations
including the ordinary skin or the location of blood transfusion during a surgery.
The most effective method to prevent infection among patients is to use each probe only once. However,
probes may need to be reused, as they are complex in design and expensive. Consequently, the safety
instructions must be followed carefully in order to minimize the risk of infection among patients.

9-9
 Operation Manual

Electric Shocks
The probe uses electrical energy. If it touches conductive materials, there are risks of electric shocks to the
patient or the user.

WARNING:
XX
Regularly receive short-circuit examination from the Samsung Medison Customer Support
Department.
XX
Do not immerse the probe into liquid.
XX
Do not drop the probe or apply mechanical shocks.
XX
Inspect the housing, strain relief, lens and seal for damage, and check for any functional problem
before and after each use.
XX
Do not apply excessive force to twist, pull or bend the probe cable. It may result in a short circuit.
XX
The power protection fuse protects the probe and the product from excess current. If the power
monitoring protection circuit detects excess current, it immediately shuts off the current to the
probe in order to prevent the probe surface from overheating and to restrict the ultrasound
power output.
XX
The temperature of the product for making contact with patients is limited under 43°C. The
ultrasound power output (AP&I) is in compliance with US FDA standards.

9-10
 Chapter 9 Probes

Cleaning and Disinfecting the Probe

Using an inappropriate detergent or disinfectant may damage the probe.

WARNING:
XX
Always use protective eyewear and gloves when cleaning and disinfecting probes.
XX
Inspect the housing, strain relief, lens and seal for damage, and check for any functional problem
after cleaning and disinfecting the probe.

Information of Detergent, Disinfectant, and Ultrasound Gel

Use an appropriate one with following tables. All probes are under tested in IPX 7 Criteria.

Disinfectants

Sani-Cloth Germicidal
Clieanisept Wipes
Sani-Cloth Active

Super Sani-Cloth
Transeptic Spray

Asepti-Wipes II
Sani-Cloth HB

Asepti-Wipes
Incidin Foam
Ster-Bac Blu

MetriWipes
Septiwipes

CaviWipes

Cidex 2%
T-Spray II

Sani-Cloth Plus

Names
T-Spray

Type S S W W W W W L S S W W W W W W L
Ammonium
Quaternary

(N-Alkyl)

IPA

NA
Active Ingredient

C1-4EC ● ● ●

C2-6IC ● ● ●

EV4-9/10ED ● ● ●

L3-8 ● ● ●

L5-13IS ● ● ● ●

P2-4BA ● ● ● ● ●

P3-8CA ● ● ● ● ●

P4-12 ● ● ● ● ●

MPT3-7
MMPT3-7
CW2.0 ● ● ●

CW4.0 ●

9-11
9-12
L3-8
Type

P4-12

CW4.0
CW2.0
Names

C2-6IC
C1-4EC

P2-4BA
L5-13IS

P3-8CA

MPT3-7

MMPT3-7
EV4-9/10ED
Active Ingredient
L

●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●

★
★
★
Cidex OPA 2,3)

●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
★
Cidex Plus 2)
Operation Manual

●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Metricide 2)
Glutaraldehyde

●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Omnicide (28)

●
●
●
Omnicide 14NS

●
●
L Omnicide - FG2

●
●
Nuclean
L

●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Wavicide-01 3)
L

●
●
Sekusept Extra
Disinfectants

●
Salvanios pH 7
L

●
●
●
Salvanios pH10
L

●
●
●
●
Steranios 2%
S

Surfaces Hautes
L

Nonionic surfactant Sekusept Plus

L

●
●
●
●
●
●
●
★
●

Milton
Sodium Hypochlorite
L

Bleach 5.25%
 L3-8
Type

P4-12

CW4.0
CW2.0
C2-6IC
C1-4EC

P2-4BA
Names

L5-13IS

P3-8CA

MPT3-7

MMPT3-7
EV4-9/10ED
Active Ingredient

x
x
L

●
●
NA Virkon

●
Sporox
Hydrogen Peroxide

x
x
L

●
Sporox II

L
Gigasept
Succindialdehyde, formaldehyde

x
x
L
Cleaner

●
●
●
Gigasept AF 3)
L

●
●

★
Bersteinsaure Gigasept FF
L

Chlorhexidine gluconate solution Hibitane

P

Peracetic Acid PeraSafe

Dodecylphenolethoxylate,

●
●
●
●
●
●
Enzol
Sodium Xylene Sulfonate

●
NA Alkazyme
L

●
●
Cidezyme
Gel

Proteolytic Enzymes
L

●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Klenzyme

x
x
L

●
●
●
●
●
Isopropyl alcohol(70%)
Chapter 9 Probes

Alcohol
L

Isopropyl alcohol(80%)

9-13
9-14
L3-8
Type

P4-12

CW4.0
CW2.0
C2-6IC
C1-4EC

P2-4BA
Names

L5-13IS

P3-8CA

MPT3-7

MMPT3-7
EV4-9/10ED
Active Ingredient
L
Alcohol Ethanol 75%

●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Propylene Glycol Metrizyme
Operation Manual

PCMX

●
●
McKesson
(Chloroxylenol)
Cleaner

G
Ammonium Chlorides Natural Image

●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
G
Aquasonics 100 3)
G

GE Ultrasound Contact Gel

G

NA Clear Image
G

Kendall
Gel

Scan
G

Wavelength
G

Sonogel
 Chapter 9 Probes

Symbols
Tips!
(1) Compatible but no EPA Registration
(2) FDA 510(k) qualified
(3) Has CE mark
(4) Discontinued
(5) Under Development
S Spray
W Wipe
L Liquid
P Powder
G Gel
x Not compatible(DO NOT USE)
● Compatible
★ Staining may occur on housing parts; however, the acoustic performance and image
quality are not affected.
■ Must not be used longer than 5 minutes.
◐ Must not be used longer than 10 minutes.
▲ Must not be used longer than 15 minutes.
◆ Must not be used longer than 20 minutes.
◇ Must not be used longer than 25 minutes.
◎ Must not be used longer than 30 minutes.
▣ Must not be used longer than 50minutes.
Blank Untested (DO NOT USE)

Following is information about manufacturer (or Distributor) of Detergent, Disinfectant, and Ultrasound Gel.

Product Manufacturer or Distributor Telephone number

Aquasonics Parker Co. +1-800-631-8888(USA)

+1-800-445-6741(USA)
Cidex CIVCO Co.
+1-319-656-4447(Worldwide)
+1-800-445-6741(USA)
Enzol CIVCO Co.
+1-319-656-4447(Worldwide)
GIgasept AF S&M(Schulke&mayr) Co. +44-114-254-3500(UK)
Gigasept FF S&M(Schulke&mayr) Co. +44-114-254-3500(UK)
Isoproppyl alcohol (70%) Local drugstore None
Klenzyme Steris Co. +1-800-548-4873(USA)

9-15
 Operation Manual

Product Manufacturer or Distributor Telephone number

+1-800-445-6741(USA)
Metricide CIVCO Co.
+1-319-656-4447(Worldwide)
Metrizyme Metrex Research Corp. +1-800-843-3343 (USA)
Milton Product & Gamble Australia Pty. Ltd. +61-1800-028-280(Australia)
+1-800-526-3867(USA)
Nuclean Nation Diagonostics Co.
+44(0)-148-264-6020(UK)
Omnicide Cottrell Ltd. +1-800-843-3343 (USA)
Sani-cloth PDI Nice/Pak Products Co. +1-914-365-1602(USA)
Sekusept Extra Henkel Hygiene GmbH. +49-0211-797-0(Germany)
Sporox II Sultan Chemist Inc. +1-800-637-8582(USA)
+1-800-445-6741(USA)
T-Spray CIVCO Co.
+1-319-656-4447(Worldwide)
Virkon Antec International LTD. +1-403-286-1771(USA)
Wavicide Wave Energy System Inc. +1-800-252-1125(USA)

Cleaning
Cleaning is an important procedure that is carried out before disinfecting the probe. The probe must be
cleaned after each use.

CAUTION:
XX
Do not use a surgical brush when cleaning probes. The use of even soft brushes can damage
the probe.
XX
During cleaning and disinfection, keep the parts of the probe that must remain dry higher than
the other parts during wetting until all parts are dry. This will help prevent liquid from entering
non-liquid-tight areas of the probe.

1. Disconnect the probe from the system.

2. Discard sheaths. (Sheaths are single-use items)
3. Use a soft cloth lightly dampened with mild soap or compatible cleaning solution to remove any
particulate matter and body fluid that remain on the probe or cable.
4. To remove remaining particulates, rinse with water up to the immersion point.
5. Wipe with a dry cloth.
6. If necessary, wipe first with a water-dampened clothe to remove soap residue.

9-16
 Chapter 9 Probes

Disinfection
A 10-6 reduction in pathogens should be reached following the disinfection procedures in this Manual
and using the following Samsung Medison recommended solutions.

WARNING:
XX
If a pre-mixed solution is used, be sure to observe the solution expiration date.
XX
The type of tissue it will contact during use dictates the level of disinfection required for
a device. Ensure that the solution strength and duration of contact are appropriate for
disinfection.
CAUTION:
XX
Using a non-recommended disinfectant or not following the recommended disinfection
method can damage and/or discolor the probe and will void the probe warranty.
XX
Do not immerse probes for longer than one hour, unless they are sterilizable.
XX
Only sterilize probes using liquid solutions. Avoid using autoclave, gas (EtO), or other non-
Samsung Medison-approved methods.

1. Follow the instructions on the disinfectant label for storage, use and disposition of the disinfectant.
2. Mix the disinfectant compatible with your probe according to lavel instructions for solution strength.
3. Immerse the probe into the disinfectant as shown in the illustration below.
4. Using the instructions on the disinfectant, rinse the probe after the immersion process is complete.
5. Air dry the probe or towel it dry with a clean cloth.

[Figure 9.1 Disinfection]

9-17
 Operation Manual

MPTEE Probe (Optional)

Multi planar transesophageal echocardiography (MPTEE) probe is one of the intracavity probes. This product,
depending on the lens rotation method used, supports MPT3-7 (normal) or MMPT3-7 (electric) probe.

NOTE: Instructions for using MPT3-7 and MMPT3-7 are different. Read the following instructions
and precautions before using either probe.

MPT3-7 Probe Use

①
②

[Figure 9.2 MPT3-7 Probe Dial]

■ Angle of lens
Use dial ① to adjust lens angle. The lens angle can be adjusted to between 0˚ and 180˚. Rotating dial
counterclockwise increases the angle.The white line is marked on MPTEE probe dial for the user’s
convenience. Set the angle to 90˚ by rotating the dial until the white line is aligned with baseline on the
center of the handle. The following figure shows when the lens angle is set to 0˚.

[Figure 9.3 Adjusting Lens Angle to 0˚]

9-18
 Chapter 9 Probes

■ Scan Head Tilting

Use dial ②. Clockwise rotation makes scan head bend to forward of the lens. Counterclockwise rotation
makes scan head bend to backward of the lens. If you make the white line meet the centerline of the
handle, the scan head become a straight line.

[Figure 9.4 Scan Head Tilting]

■ Locked Mode
Makes the lens movement less natural than in the open state, preventing movement of the lens and
head during use. Rotate MPT3-7 silver handle until a red marker is shown to put the probe into the
locked state.

[Figure 9.5 Lock Status]

9-19
 Operation Manual

MMPT3-7 Probe Use

1
2
3 4

[Figure 9.6 MMPT3-7 Probe Dial]

Lens Angle Adjustment

„„
The lens angle can be adjusted to between 0˚ and 180˚ by using buttons ③ and ④. Button ③
rotates the lens angle counterclockwise. Button ④ rotates the lens angle clockwise.

Scan Head Tilting

„„
Use dials ① and ②. Rotate dial ① clockwise to tilt the lens forward. Rotate the dial counterclockwise
to tilt the lens backward. Rotate dial ② clockwise to tilt the lens sideways.

[Figure 9.7 Scan Head Tilting]

9-20
 Chapter 9 Probes

Locked Mode
„„
Makes the lens movement less natural than in the open state, preventing movement of the lens and
head during use. Rotate MMPT3-7’s silver handle until a red marker is shown to put the probe into
the locked state.

[Figure 9.8 Locked State]

Safety precautions

DANGER: Do not use the probe under the temperature less than 25°C or higher than 42°C.
This may cause personal injury.

CAUTION:
XX
Do not move the system with MPTEE probe on the probe holder. MPTEE probe can fall down
because it is not set.
XX
To protect the patient and the probe, unlock the deflection control when inserting or
withdrawing the probe.

9-21
 Operation Manual

If the temperature of surface temperature is over 40°C, the warning message will be appeared.

40°C: Estimated surface temperature of 40degrees C

XX

41°C: Estimated surface temperature of 41degrees C

XX

42°C: Estimated surface temperature of 42degrees C

XX

43°C: Approaching thermal limit; currently 43 degrees C

XX

44°C: Critical scanhead temperature (MPTEE probe will be Lock up, and Probe selection window will
XX
be displayed.)

CAUTION: Keep MPTEE probe clean because this is intracavity probe. Do not put MPTEE probe on
the floor.

NOTE:
XX
Put MPTEE probe on the left holder of system. The right probe holder is not fit for MPTEE probe.
XX
A pyrogen-free sheath is recommended to use with MPTEE probe.

Maintenance
Adequate cleaning and, if necessary disinfection are carried out to prevent disease transmission. It is the
responsibility of the user to verify and maintain the effectiveness of the procedure used.

CAUTION: Keep the handle and probe connector out of any cleaning or disinfection solutions.
The handle and cable may be cleaned with a damp cloth, but only the end of the probe up to the
100cm marker on the shaft may be placed into a disinfection solution.

■ Cleaning

CAUTION: Do not clean any portion of the probe with methanol or ethanol. Such substance can
cause irreparable damage to the probe.

1. Clean the scan head and flexible shaft with gauze pads soaked in mild soapy lukewarm water (below
26°C is recommended). Remove any materials that could inter­fere with the disinfection procedure.
2. Rinse the scan head and shaft with lukewarm water, in which one can hold one’s hand without pain.
Proceed until all visible soap residue has been removed.
3. Air-dry or dry with a soft cloth.

9-22
 Chapter 9 Probes

Cleaner Supplier Active ingredient Concentration

Cidezyme / Enzol ASP J&J Proteolytic enzymes <5%

EMpower Metrex Proteolytic enzymes <2%

Hycolin Coventry Chemicals Alkyldimethylbenzylammonium 1-10%

chloride
Tetrasodium EDTA 1-10%
Alcohol ethoxylate 1-10%

Metrizyme Metrex Proteolytic enzymes <2%

Prolystica 2x conc. Steris Ethanollamine 1-5%

Enzymatic Presoak & Protease 0.1-1%
cleaner Ethoxylated alcohol 1-5%
Polyalkylene glycol 1-5%
Glycerine 1-5%

T-spray Pharmaceutical N-alkyl-(C12-18)-n-N-dimethyl-N-

Innovations Inc. Benzyl-ammonium-chloride; Alkyl-
dimethyl-ethyl-benzyl-ammonium-
chloride

T-spray 2 Pharmaceutical Alkyl-dimethyl-benzyl-ammonium-

Innovations Inc. chloride; Octyl-decyl-dimethyl-
ammonium-chloride; Dioctyl-
dimethyl-ammonium-chloride;
Didecyl-dimethyl-ammonium-chloride

■ Disinfection

WARNING: Do not use other disinfection methods like ethanol, Iodine, Steam, Heat or Ethy­lene
Oxide.

CAUTION:
XX
The probe should never be left in the disinfection solution for more than 1 hour.
XX
Do not forget to rinse the probe directly after disinfection.

When necessary ultrasound probes can be disinfected using liquid chemical germicides. Cidex, Cidex-
OPA, Metricide, Om­nicide and Giga­sept solutions have been tested for compatibility with the materials
used to construct the probe. Follow the disinfectant manu­facturer’s recom­mendations for solu­tion
preparation, immer­sion time and rinsing.

9-23
 Operation Manual

1. Place the cleaned and dried probe surface (the end of probe and up to the 100cm marker only) in
contact with the disinfection solution.

2. Rinse the scan head and shaft with water and dry prior to storage.

Disinfectance Supplier Active ingredient Concentration

Cidex ADS ASP J&J Gluteraldehyde 2.55%

Cidex Plus ASP J&J Gluteraldehyde 3.40%

Cidex OPA ASP J&J Ortho-phthaladehyde 0.55%

Gigasept AF Schulke und Mayr Didecyldimethylammoniumchloride 15%

Glycine, aminoalkyl derivs 6.9%
Tridecylpolyethylenglycoether 15-30%
N-(3-Aminopropyl)-N- <5%
dodecylpropane-1,3-diamine

Gigasept FF Schulke und Mayr Formaldehyde 4.5%

Dimethoxytetrohydrofurane 3.2%
Succindialdehyde 4.5%

Korsolex extra Bode Chemie Gluteraldehyde 5-10%

Metricide Metrex Gluteraldehyde 2.60%

Metricide 28 Metrex Gluteraldehyde 2.50%

Metricide Plus 30 Metrex Gluteraldehyde 3.40%

Metricide OPA Plus Metrex Ortho-phthaladehyde 0.60%

Omnicyde 14 N.S. Coventry Chemicals Gluteraldehyde 2.60%

Omnicide 28 Coventry Chemicals Gluteraldehyde 2.50%

Perasafe Dupont Sodium Perborate 40-60%

Sekusept Aktiv Ecolab Sodium Perborate monohydrate 30-50%

Citric Acid 15-20%
Fatty alcohol ethoxylate <5%

Steranios 2%, 2% Anios Gluteraldehyde 2.00%

N.G., 2% E.C.S.

TD100 & TD5 CS Medical Gluteraldehyde 2.65%

Totacide 28 Coventry Chemicals Gluteraldehyde 2.00%

Virkon Dupont Potassium peroxymonosulphate <50%

Wavicide 01 Medical Chemical Corp. Gluteraldehyde 2.65%

9-24